Blog

Passive sentences are – When writing sentences in Indonesian, of course there are a lot of variations. In fact, with the selection of the right sentence, it can produce a paragraph that is easy to understand. In Indonesian, sentences can be divided into two types, namely passive sentences and active sentences.

These two sentences are often used by many Indonesians. In addition, passive sentences and active sentences have been taught since we were still in elementary school. Talking about these two sentences must be very long, so on this occasion, we will only discuss passive sentences.

Then, do you already know about passive sentences? If you haven’t or you forgot about the discussion about passive sentences, then you can refer to this article, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Passive Sentences

Passive sentence is a type of sentence which states that the subject in the sentence receives the action from the object. In a passive sentence, the subject does not take action, but accepts the action. An example of a passive sentence is The book was written by him .

Using passive sentences can have an effect on the way the reader or listener captures the information in the sentence. In the example above, the main focus is on the book and who wrote it, not who did the writing action.

However, passive sentences can also be less effective in conveying information. Active voice, which puts the subject in the position of taking action, is easier to understand and more effective in conveying information. An example of an active sentence from the example above is “ He wrote the book ” (He wrote the book).

In general, passive sentences are more often used in scientific or legal texts, while active sentences are more often used in everyday communication. However, the use of passive or active sentences depends on the context and purpose of communication. In simple terms, it is an explanation of the passive voice, its use depends on the context and purpose of communication. However, in formal writing such as reports or essays, it is better to avoid using the passive voice as they are less effective at conveying information.

Passive Sentence Structure

In Indonesian, a passive sentence structure is a sentence structure that uses the verb “to use” (used as the passive form of the verb “to use”) and shows that the subject of the sentence receives the action of the verb. For example:

1. This book is used by them. (They wear this book.)
2. The cake was baked by mother. (Mom baked the cake.)
3. The house was built by carpenters. (The carpenter built the house.)

Note that in passive sentence structure, the subject of the sentence is usually unknown or unspecified. If you want to state the subject specifically, then we can add the preposition “by” in front of the subject. Example:

1. This book is used by those who have borrowed it.
2. The cake was baked by my mother in the kitchen.
3. The house was built by a famous carpenter in this town.

Passive sentence structure in Indonesian consists of several elements, namely subject, predicate, and actor. The subject in the passive voice is the person or thing that receives the action or actions taken by the actor. In the example “Order received by me by courier”, the subject is “order”.

The predicate in the passive sentence is a verb that shows the action or action taken by the actor. In this example, the predicate is “accepted”. The actor in the passive voice is the person or thing that performs the action or action. In this example, the culprit is the “courier”. Actors in passive sentences are usually indicated by the word “by” after the predicate.

In general, the passive sentence structure in Indonesian is “accepted (predicate) + by (subject) + by (performer)”. It should be remembered that in Indonesian the passive voice is not as popular as in other languages, so in the appropriate context the active voice is used.

 

Now, through this Basic Indonesian Grammar book , it will be easier for you to follow each of the steps in making passive sentences. This book is written in simple language, making it suitable for beginners.

This book gives us language-related learning. Even though you are an Indonesian, speaking Indonesian properly and correctly is still homework for many people. Especially for writers and academics, the use of Indonesian with correct grammar is a must.

If you still have trouble organizing your Indonesian writing, then buy this book. The Basic Indonesian Grammar Book contains material on basic Indonesian grammar rules. In this book you will see how writers in print media organize their writing so that it is neater and easier to read, and is true to the rules of the Indonesian language. Apart from that, those of you who are also students or academics can also take additional information to optimize the writing of your academic work.

This book is compiled based on data on the use of various written languages ​​by writers published in books, magazines and newspapers. From the accurate data, regularity is obtained in the form of words and the arrangement of sentences and paragraphs. This phenomenon illustrates that there is a system for word formation and Indonesian sentence construction.

This book does not only explain the rules of morphology and syntax, but also provides guidance on the proper and correct use of words, sentences and paragraphs. Therefore, this book is very useful for users of the Indonesian language, students, teachers, researchers and writers, as well as the print media community in order to achieve a stable position and function of the Indonesian language in academic life and learning Indonesian.

Back to discussing passive sentences again, Sinaumed’s. In the next discussion, we will discuss about the types of passive sentences. So, keep reading this article until it’s finished.

Types of Passive Sentences

Passive sentences are sentences where the subject does not perform the action given by the verb (verb), but the subject accepts the action. In the passive voice, the doer of the action is usually not named or placed in front of the subject.

Passive sentence layers are different from active sentences. According to the comments of experts such as Kridalaksana (1993) explains that there are 2 types of passive sentences, namely the subject is a sentence that has an object or subject that is carrying out activities. There are also passive sentences without a subject because they are not the main focus. In contrast to Sugono’s comments (2009), passive sentences consist of the prefix di-, passive sentences with the prefix di- plus an actor, and passive sentences with the prefix ter-.

Transitive passive sentences are sentences that indicate that the subject receives the action of the object. In transitive passive sentences, the subject of the sentence is in the passive position and the object of the sentence is in the active position. Examples of transitive passive sentences: The cake was eaten by the boy . (The cake is eaten by the boys.)

Semitransitive passive sentences are sentences that indicate that the subject in the sentence accepts the action of the object, but does not indicate who is doing the action. An example is The book was read by the students . (The book is read by the students.) In this sentence, the subject “the book” receives the action of the object “the students,” but it does not indicate who specifically performs the reading action.

Passive sentences are sentences where the subject receives the action of the object in the sentence. For example, The ball was kicked by the boy . In this sentence, the subject “ball” receives the action “herded” from the object “boy”.

Passive sentences are sentences that describe that the subject receives action from the object. Passive state is a form of passive sentence which describes that the subject is in a certain state or condition. For example: The book is being read by the student (the book is being read by students). In this sentence, the subject (“book”) receives the action (“being read”) from the object (“student”). The passive state here is “being read” which indicates that the book is being read.

 

To find out the various types of passive sentences, you can read the Indonesian Grammar book . This book is very suitable to be used as teaching material for children to know the types and forms of sentences. This book is about grammar. Grammar is a type of language rule that regulates the criteria for using words and sentences. The position of grammar studies is the main one in language learning, especially in the structural approach.

Grammar is a study material for teachers and language learners. Meanwhile, in the 16th and 17th centuries, which were the Enlightenment Ages, scholars studied a lot about the discussion, arrangement and comparison of grammar. Grammar is also one of the main problems in reading and writing learning activities.

In learning Indonesian, of course we will not be separated from grammar. Grammar which in English is called Grammar is very important as an initial capital that must be mastered by an English speaker to be able to communicate properly and correctly. In Indonesia, the quality of applying grammar is still very low, this is evident as practiced by the Indonesian people in the mass media and in real life.

This book is an easy and practical guide for language users, especially Indonesian, in speaking and communicating properly and correctly, both in written and spoken language. Apart from that, it is also equipped with various languages, styles of language, errors in language, proverbs, and idioms. Therefore, this book is expected to be a guide for students or readers in general who wish to develop their Indonesian language skills properly and correctly.

After knowing about the types of passive sentences, then in the following discussion, we will discuss the characteristics of passive sentences.

Characteristics of Passive Sentences

In Indonesian, there are several characteristics that can be used to identify passive sentences. Following are some of them:

1. Passive sentences use the auxiliary verb “used” or “in” before the second form of the verb

For example: “My order was processed by the cashier.” (passive voice) “The cashier took my order.” (Active sentence)

2. The subject of the passive sentence is the object of the action being performed

For example: “My order was processed by the cashier.” (The subject is “my order”)

3. The object of the active sentence becomes the subject of the passive sentence

For example: “My order was processed by the cashier.” (The object is “cashier”)

4. Passive sentences do not indicate the culprit

For example: “My order was processed.” (Not shown who processed the order)

5. The verb in the passive voice is always the 2nd form of the verb (done)

For example: “My order was processed by the cashier.” (The verb is “processed”)

Remember that the passive voice doesn’t always have to contain the auxiliary verb “used” or “in” before the second form of the verb. There are several verbs that automatically form passive sentences without the need to use the auxiliary verb, such as “understood”, “known”, “reported”, and so on.

The Difference between Passive Sentences and Active Sentences

Passive sentences and active sentences are two types of sentences that differ in form and function.

Active voice shows the subject doing the action. In active sentences, the subject is at the front of the sentence and is followed by a verb that shows the action taken by the subject. For example: “John reads a book” (John = subject, read = verb).

The passive voice shows the subject receiving the action. In passive sentences, the subject comes at the end of the sentence and is followed by the verb that is accepted by the subject. For example: “The book was read by John” (book = subject, read = verb).

In general, active sentences are used to convey focus on the action performed by the subject, while passive sentences are used to convey focus on the result of the action or the object that receives the action.

Keep in mind, the passive voice also needs a “by” to show who is doing the action. However, passive sentences are often considered less effective in everyday communication because they are more complicated and less clear than active sentences.

To make or do learning forms and types of sentences such as passive sentences is not easy. Therefore, a book is really needed that can be used as a guide in order to produce an impressive design. The Elementary School Indonesian Grammar Book is perfect for beginners who are just getting into grammar. Get this book immediately by clicking on the image below.

 

Conclusion

Passive sentences are sentences in which the subject does not perform the action governed by the verb, but the subject accepts the action. In passive sentences, the object of the active sentence becomes the subject of the passive sentence.

The passive voice is often used to emphasize the object of an action, or to avoid mentioning who performed the action. For example, the sentence “ The box was carried by John ” emphasizes the box as the object of the act carried, while the sentence “ The crime was committed by an unknown suspect ” disguises who did the action.

Well, Sinaumed’s, our article regarding the meaning of passive sentences has been completed, after knowing passive sentences, are Sinaumed’s friends interested and awakening their awareness to pay attention to accuracy in writing and speaking when using Indonesian?

If sinaumedia friends are interested and want to learn more about the types and forms of sentences, then sinaumedia.com is ready to accompany and fill your reading with books available at sinaumedia. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Mutual

Reference:

• https://www.detik.com/edu/detikpedia/d-5815100/how-to-make-kalimat-pasif-ini-ciri-ciri-dan-examples
• https://katadata.co.id/safrezi/berita/61a86ab410e67/pengertian-exemplary-dan-tipe-kalimat-pasif
• https://www.brainacademy.id/blog/kalimat-aktif-kalimat-pasif

 

Pascal’s Law – When You is engrossed in driving, be it using a bicycle or motorbike, have you ever experienced a sudden flat tire? If that happened, surely You would immediately push his vehicle to the tire repair shop, right ? However, what if the leak is a car tire? Will You also push the car to the nearest tire patch? Of course not , because it’s really hard, especially when you’re alone. So, to anticipate this, usually a replacement tire and a hydraulic jack will be provided in the car. Yep, a hydraulic jack is a special tool that can be used to lift certain car parts, one of which is the tire.

Did You know that the process of lifting a car tire using a hydraulic jack was not arbitrary, but had to be based on the principles of Physics, namely Pascal’s Law? Yep, the process of jacking up car tires turns out to require calculations, just like Physics in general. Then, what is Pascal ‘s Law? How does Pascal’s Law sound? How is the application of Pascal’s law to everyday human life? So, so that You can understand these things, let’s look at the following review!

How Does Pascal’s Law Sound?

Basically, Pascal’s law is indeed part of various physical laws which turn out to provide benefits for everyday human life. Pascal’s law reads ” The pressure exerted on a liquid in a closed space is transmitted equally in all directions”. Pascal’s law was created by a French physicist named Blaise Pascal.

A simple example is you have a perforated plastic bag filled with water and then squeezed out, what would happen? Now, when you squeeze the plastic bag filled with water, there will be pressure on the water in the bag, causing two things:

• Water will gush out of the bag openings. That means, the pressure you exerted earlier, is transmitted through the water in the bag.
• Water gushes from each hole with equal force. That means pressure in the water, acting in all directions.

Based on this simple example, it can be said that Pascal’s Law is a law of fluid physics which explains that from the presence of pressure exerted on a static fluid in a confined space, it will later be forwarded in all directions, which of course is with the same strong pressure.

Just a little trivia , You , Pascal’s Law was coined by a French physicist named Blaise Pascal, who was born in Clermont on July 19, 1623. Actually, Blaise Pascal was not only a physicist, but also a philosopher and theologian. However, he really likes things in the fields of mathematics and physics, especially in terms of projective geometry, which later led him to become an expert in the field of fluid mechanics physics, especially those related to pressure and force.

Moreover, when he was 18 years old, Pascal was able to create the world’s first digital calculator! Pascal spent his time playing and experimenting, even during his current cancer treatment. Pascal’s law was discovered when he was experimenting with water. At that time, Pascal was conducting experiments on water and stated that water would come out faster and farther through the hole in a container with an open top surface, when compared to a container with a closed top surface. Well, that’s what causes the water pressure to be greater than the open container.

Pascal’s Law Formulas

Basically, Pascal’s Law is a working principle that has a relationship between the pressure caused by a liquid in a closed space. Pascal’s law illustrates that any increase in pressure on the surface of the fluid must be forwarded in all directions of the fluid. Pascal’s law is only applied to fluids, especially liquid fluids. It should be noted that fluids are substances that easily flow, such as liquids and gases.

Just a little information , yes , fluids are all substances that can flow. This flowing substance, of course, has the ability to form according to the container that holds it. For example, the liquid is accommodated in a bucket container, it will form like the bucket. It should also be noted that the atoms and molecules of the fluid move freely.

In this case, fluids have several types, namely static fluids and dynamic fluids.

Well, here is an explanation of Pascal’s Law if it is applied in a closed U-shaped vessel.

Information:

P1 = Pressure on first suction (N/m²)

P2 = Pressure at second suction (N/m²)

F1 = Force on the first suction (N)

F2 = Force on the second suction (N)

A1 = Area on first suction (m²)

A2 = Area on the second suction (m²)

Based on Pascal’s Law, pressure (P) will later be forwarded in all directions equally to suction 2. So, suction 2 with a cross-sectional area A2 will receive pressure (P1). If, there is a force generated by pressure (P1) on cross section A2, then it becomes a force (F), so the following equation will be obtained:

F 1 = force on A 1 (N)

F 2 = force on A 2 (N)

A 1 = cross sectional area 1 (m² )

A 2 = cross-sectional area 2 (m² )

This is because A2 > A1, then F2 > F1, causing the force acting on the cross section of A2 to be greater.

Questions and Discussion of Pascal’s Law

In order for You to understand more about Pascal’s Law, try to look at the questions and discussion below!

1. There is a hydraulic lifter which has two suction cups with respective cross-sectional areas A 1 = 100 cm2 , and A 2 = 2000 cm2 . What is the minimum force , F , that must be exerted on cross section A 1 so that a car weighing 15,000 N can be lifted?

DISCUSSION

Noted that:

A1 = 100 cm2

A 2 = 2000 cm2

w = F 2 , = 15,000 N

If applied using the working principle of Pascal’s Law, it will become:

So, the minimum force (F) needed to lift the car is 750 N.

2. There is a hydraulic jack with a large cross-sectional radius of 2 cm, while the small cross-sectional radius is 25 cm. What force (F) is exerted by the small section to lift a 2 ton truck?

DISCUSSION

Noted that:

r1 = 2 cm = 0.02 m
r2 = 25 cm = 0.25 m
A1 = (3.14)(0.02)2 = 0.001256 m2
A2 = (3.14)(0.25)2 = 0.19625 m2
F2 = w = mg = (2000). 10 = 20,000 N

Asked : F1 ?

Answer:
F1/A1 = F2/A2
F1/0.001256 = 20,000/0.19625
0.19625 x F1 = (20,000) x 0.001256

F1 = 25.12/0.19625 = 28 N

So, the force needed to lift a truck weighing 2 tons is 28 N.

Benefits of Pascal’s Law in Human Life

The existence of Pascal’s Law is not merely just an ordinary calculation, you know, it turns out that its working principle can also be applied and proven to be useful for everyday human life. Remember that Blaise Pascal gained an understanding of Pascal’s Law after he conducted an experiment using a sprayer, which then stated that the pressure exerted on a liquid in a closed space can later be transmitted in all directions with the same force. Then, what are the benefits of Pascal’s law in human everyday technology? Let’s look at the following reviews!

1. Hydraulic Jack

Generally, this hydraulic jack is used to lift heavy loads with a small force. The hydraulic jack will have two tubes of different sizes, one large diameter and the other small diameter, then the two tubes are filled with water. Then, each of them is also equipped with suction. The pressure exerted on the small suction cup will then be forwarded to the large suction cup. Meanwhile, a large suction will produce a much greater upward lift. That is why the existence of this hydraulic jack can be used to lift heavy loads, especially to hold the car when changing tires.

2. Car Lifting Tool

Of course, You is no stranger to this car lift, because usually it can be easily found in car repair shops, showrooms, and car wash places. The working principle of this car lifter uses air that has high pressure, then is inserted through one of the two taps in the tool. The air is then compressed in a room to produce a large pressure. The large pressure will then be forwarded by oil to a larger suction cup. Through that pressure, it will generate a very large lift force to be able to lift even a car.

After that, lowering the car can be done by removing the compressed air through the other faucet, namely the air outlet faucet.

3. Hydraulic Brake

These hydraulic brakes are usually on vehicles, one of which is a bicycle. The main parts of hydraulic brakes will usually contain the brake pedal, master cylinder, clamp shoes, and brake fluid. When the brake pedal is pressed with our foot, the pressure will be transmitted by the brake fluid to the clamp shoe through the brake cylinder. In this case, the brake cylinder would have 4 brake cylinders, with two at the front and two at the rear.

Meanwhile, the flip-flops will produce a very large frictional force, so that they can stop the rotation of the wheels of the vehicle. This is also due to the suction area of ​​the brake cylinder which is much larger than the suction area of ​​the master cylinder.

Understanding What is a Hydraulic System

The hydraulic system will not be separated from Pascal’s Law, because it is an application of the use of these physical laws. Basically, the hydraulic system becomes a system that uses liquid fluid power to do simple jobs. Yep, the hydraulic system is a power transfer system that uses liquid or fluid as an intermediary. In fact, this hydraulic system has many advantages compared to mechanical systems. Some of the advantages are in the form of:

• Can channel great force.
• Not difficult for overload prevention.
• Operating style control becomes easier fast.
• Speed ​​switching becomes easier.
• The vibrations generated are relatively small.
• Longer endurance.

Unfortunately, even though this hydraulic system has many advantages, there are still disadvantages, namely:

• Sensitive to leaks.
• Sensitive to changes in temperature.
• Sometimes the work speed changes.
• Channel system work is not simple.

So, that’s a review of what Pascal’s law is and its application in tools that make it easier for humans to live their daily lives. Has You ever used a hydraulic jack to change a car tire?

Parts of a Plant Cell Composition – Plant cell composition basically consists of several structures wrapped in a cell wall. Plants themselves can be said to have a fairly important role in other living things, especially the living environment of creatures.

Meanwhile, the constituent cells in plants are known to have a function as a regulator of all their activities, from forming plants to processing the growth and development of the plant itself.

Well, this article will present an explanation of what actually makes up a plant cell. Based on the material quoted from the book Fundamentals of Plant Physiology by Linda Advinda, here are some of the constituents of plant cells that you need to know, including:

A. Parts of Plant Cells

1. Cell membranes

The cell membrane or often also called the plasma membrane is a structure that almost all living things have, from animals, plants, fungi, bacteria, archaea, to protists.

The cell membrane itself can be analogous to a plastic bag that is used to wrap all shopping items. The cell membrane is known as the outermost layer that wraps and protects the cell components inside. This cell membrane has a layer composed of various chemical compounds, ranging from lipids (phospholipids), proteins, to carbohydrates.

Apart from that, you also need to know that the cell membrane encloses the cytoplasm and the cell nucleus. Cytoplasm is basically a complex part of the cell. The cytoplasm actually contains many molecules, such as colou and several other cell organelles. This allows the plasma membrane to function as a regulator of several solutes that enter and leave the cell at once in osmosis.

As the outermost part of the cell structure of living things, the cell membrane is located before the cell wall in the cell structure of plants and fungi. Therefore, the cell membrane is semipermeable. This is due to the structure of phospholipids. Semipermeable itself is a property that only allows certain substances to enter the cell.

2. Cell Wall

Unlike the cell membranes of animals or humans, plant and fungal cells are known to have a unique structure, namely the cell wall. With the cell wall, this makes plants have a unique structure compared to cells in animals.

The cell wall that is owned by this plant has a function as a protector of plant cells. Not only that, the cell wall also plays a role in maintaining the shape of the cell while preventing excessive water absorption. The cell wall is also thought to be the cause of plants not being able to move freely or being stiff. Even so, plants still have a motion called passive motion or not moving positions.

Plant cells themselves have two types of cell walls, namely primary and secondary cells. The primary cell wall lies between the middle lamella and the secondary cell wall. Some of the ingredients contained in the primary cell wall are hemicellulose, cellulose (low levels), lipids and proteins. This makes the primary cell wall more flexible and thinner than the secondary cell wall because it is formed when the cell divides.

Meanwhile, cells that have been thickened with lignin will form a secondary cell wall. Therefore, the secondary cell wall is known to have a thicker, stiffer, and stronger texture than the primary cell wall. In addition to the presence of lignin substances, the secondary cell walls also contain compounds such as cellulose and hemicellulose.

3. Cytoplasm

The fluid in the cell that is between the nucleus and the plasma membrane is known as the cytoplasm. The cytoplasm itself basically has two constituent components, namely the cytosol and several other organelles. Cytosol is a constituent component that has a liquid part of the cytoplasm and surrounds the organelles.

Therefore, there is about 70 to 90% water in it with various solute contents. These various dissolved substances consist of proteins, lipids, and other waste substances such as carbon dioxide. The cytosol itself has a function as a place for chemical reactions. For example, the chemical reaction in glycolysis. Not only the cytosol, in the cytoplasm there are also various organelles that are separate from the cell structure.

So, here are some of the functions of the cytoplasm that you need to know, including:

• As a place where chemical reactions take place,
• Store various types of chemicals used for cell metabolism processes
• Solvent for all proteins and compounds in the cell
• Intermediaries for the transfer of materials from outside the cell to the organelles or cell nucleus

4. Nucleus

The nucleus itself can be said to be the core of the cells that are owned by plants. This nucleus is the center of cell administration which can direct metabolic processes, ranging from growth, division, even protein synthesis. In the nucleus or cell nucleus, chromosomes or a genetic component are often stored, which are composed of various chromatin threads.

5. Ribosomes

Ribosomes become one part of the next plant cell constituent. These ribosomes can be understood as particles smaller than mitochondria. Although small, ribosomes are the building blocks of plant cells that have a compact size. Until now, the only tool that could be used to see ribosomes in plant cells was the electron microscope.

Ribosomes themselves are very easy to find in plant cells. This is because ribosomes are scattered in the cytoplasm or attached to the outside of the endoplasmic reticulum (RE). These organelles are usually composed of RNA and protein. Therefore, ribosomes can be said to be very functional for making proteins in plant cells.

6. Endoplasmic Reticulum

After discussing the ribosome, this section will also discuss the endoplasmic reticulum or commonly abbreviated as RE. RE itself can be understood as a cell organ that acts as a channel in the cytoplasm that connects the cell membrane to the nucleus.

The endoplasmic reticulum itself is often referred to as the transport system that exists in plant cells for various molecules in the cell. However, not only in cells, ER can also transport various molecules between cells through plasmodesmata. This makes this cell organ has a function as a protein transport.

In addition, the endoplasmic reticulum is known to have a structure that is shaped like a multi-layered sac. These multi-layered sacs are often also referred to as cisternae. Endoplasmic reticulum in plant cell structure consists of two types, namely rough ER and smooth ER. The rough endoplasmic reticulum can be characterized by the presence of ribosomes covering it. Meanwhile, the smooth endoplasmic reticulum is not covered by ribosomes.

7. Golgi apparatus

The Golgi apparatus was originally discovered by a histologist and pathologist from Italy, a figure named Camillo Golgi. In plant constituent cells, the Golgi body is also commonly referred to as a dictyosome. The Golgi apparatus can be understood as a pile of membrane-lined sacks whose job is to prepare proteins to be exported from the cell.

8. Mitochondria

Mitochondria can be regarded as a cell organelle that has a complex structure to form energy for plants. In other living things, mitochondria can be used as a place for respiration. Respiration itself is a process of decomposition or catabolism that is used to produce energy or energy for living processes to take place.

Mitochondria are known to be found in cells that have high metabolic activity and require large amounts of ATP. Not surprisingly, if the structure of mitochondria can be seen using an electron microscope. Mitochondria are surrounded by two layers of the membrane.

9. Lysosomes

The cells that make up the next plant are lysosomes. This lysosome itself can be said to be the digestive center of the cell which produces various types of enzymes. Lysosomes are also known to be able to break down food particles and recycle worn out cell components.

10. Vacuoles

Vacuoles are adult plant cells filled with fluid and contain dissolved inorganic ions, organic acids, sugars, enzymes, and other secondary metabolites. In simple terms, a vacuole can be said to have a function as a repository for toxic waste and other useful products, such as water. Vacuoles in plant cells occupy the range from 80 to 90% of the total cell volume.

11. Chloroplasts

The last cell organ that only exists in plants is the chloroplast. Chloroplasts can be understood as cell organs that contain green pigments that capture sunlight to be converted into sugar. This process itself is usually referred to as photosynthesis to produce carbohydrates and oxygen in plants.

In addition, there are also some plants that have chromoplast cell organs. Chromoplast itself can be said as a cell organelle that has a green or orange color. These cell organelles are usually found in plants, such as tubers, carrots, and also flowers.

Almost the same as chloroplasts and chromoplasts, leucoplasts are cell organelles that do not have color pigments. These leucoplasts are usually located in parts of plants that are not green, such as roots or stems. Meanwhile, amyloplasts were also found in the roots and stems of plants. Amyloplast has a function as a storage product of photosynthesis in the form of flour.

This is an explanation of the composition of plant cells. Basically, there are many materials that make up plant cells. Therefore, you need to read material about the constituents of plant cells over and over again to understand more.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

 

Part Of Speech Material: Example Sentences, Questions, and Discussion – When studying English, we will find the terms noun, adjective, pronoun and so on. These terms are part of the part of speech.

Part of speech has an important role in forming a sentence so that it is coherent and in accordance with the grammar of the sentence. To find out more about this part of speech , the author has summarized the meaning, types and how to use the correct part of speech .

Definition of Part Of Speech 

Part of speech is a classification of words categorized by roles and functions in sentences of a language.

By knowing the part of speech one can know the function of the word in a sentence.

In addition, part of speech is the first step that you need to learn when learning English, its use is to understand sentence forms in English.

Part of speech in English is divided into eight types, viz

1. nouns or nouns,
2. pronouns or pronouns,
3. verbs or verbs,
4. adjectives or adjectives,
5. adverb or description,
6. prepositions or prepositions,
7. conjunction or conjunctions,
8. interjection or interjection.

Following is a further explanation of the eight types of part of speech and a table of part of speech.

Table  of Part Of Speech

part of speech	function or “job”	example words	example sentences
verb	action or state	(to) be, have, do, like, work, sing, can, must	sinaumedia Literacy is  a web site. I  like sinaumedia Literacy.
noun	thing or person	pen, dog, work, music, town, London, teacher, John	This is my  dog ​​. He lives in my  house . We live in  London .
Adjective	describes a noun	good, big, red, well, interesting	Budi is a good teacher
adverb	describes a verb, adjective or adverb	quickly, silently, well, badly, very, really	My dog ​​eats  quickly . When he is  very  hungry, he eats  really  quickly.
Pronouns	replaces a noun	I, you, he, she, some	Tara is Indian. She  is beautiful.
Prepositions	links a noun to another word	to, at, after, on, but	We went  to  school  on  Monday.
conjunctions	joins clauses or sentences or words	and, but, when	I like dogs  and  I like cats. I like cats  and  dogs. I like dogs  but  I don’t like cats.
Interjections	short exclamation, sometimes inserted into a sentence	oh!, ouch!, hi!, well	Ouch ! That hurts! Hi ! How are you? Well , I don’t know.

8 Types of Part Of Speech  and Examples of Part Of Speech 

1. Noun / noun

Nouns are used to name people, things, animals, places, ideas or concepts.

As the name implies, nouns are used to mark an object. Usually at the beginning of a noun there is a particle, an or the .

Nouns can be singular or plural as well as concrete or abstract forms. In a sentence, a noun can function as a subject, object or preposition.

Nouns are further divided into seven types, viz

1. countable,
2. uncountable noun,
3. proper,
4. common nouns,
5. abstract,
6. concrete nouns
7. collective nouns .

Types of nouns and examples:

1. Countable or countable,this noun is a noun that can be counted, for example book, car, phone, bottle . This sentence is a countable noun , because it is clear that the number can be counted easily.
   
2. Uncountable , is the opposite of countable . Nouns of this type cannot be counted, or things that are so large that they cannot be counted. Examples are sand, rice, milk, snow .
3. Proper nouns are nouns that have the form of names or nicknames, so that the first letter is capitalized, proper nouns can also be referred to asspecific nouns referring to the naming of an object, nickname or name. For example Indonesia, England, Everest, Sahara, Simone and so on.
4. Common Noun , the opposite of a proper noun, a common noun is a common noun , so the first letter of the common noun is not capitalized. For example, country, city, mount, month . The four nouns do not specifically mention the name of the country, city, mount and month referred to in a sentence.
5. Abstract noun , as the name implies, this noun expresses things that are abstract in nature such as ideas, concepts, situations, feelings and so on. For example time, idea, imagination.
   
6. Concrete noun , this noun is something that is tangible and the word is material. For example cheese, chocolate, table, hat .
7. Collective noun , is a noun or noun that is collective or a collection or group name or refers to a group of animals, people or objects. For example couple, staff, government, utensils, family .

2. Pronouns / pronouns

Pronouns are words that are used to replace nouns .

The use of pronouns can prevent repetition of words which can lead to bad discourse. Pronouns like nouns have several types, including the following.

Types of pronouns and examples:

1. Personal , is a pronoun to replace the designation of the person, namely I, You, We, They, He, She, It, Them.
   
2. Demonstrative pronoun , to replace the demonstrative word according to the number and distance. For example this, that, these, those.
3. Interrogative , to ask questions. For example who, which, whom, whose, what.
4. Indefinite , to state a general thing. For example another, anything, everyone, everything, someone, none, nothing, anywhere.
   
5. Possessive , to show possession or ownership , for example mine, your, hers, his.
   
6. Reciprocal pronoun , to show the word when two or more subjects perform the same action against each other. For example each other, one another
7. Relative pronouns , for relative clauses. For example who, which, whom, who.
8. Reflexive , to state that the subject receives the action of the verb. For example, myself, myself, myself, myself.
9. Intensive , for example, himself, himself, himself, themselves. \

3. Verb / verb

Verb is a verb that is used to express the action, action or state of the subject to show events or circumstances.

Various verbs

Verb has 3 kinds, including:

1. Action transitive verb . Indicates the action or ownership and use followed by the direct object. Examples are as follows have, give ride, ask, buy, hit, make, show, eat, drink, sit, stand.
2. Intransitive action verbs . The opposite of a transitive verb, showing action but not followed by a direct object. For example arrive, rise, wait, come, go, smile, wait. 
3. Linking verb , a verb that shows a connecting subject. For example taste, be, remain, act, look seem. 

In studying verbs in English, you can look through the Complete New Phrasal Verb Dictionary (English-Indonesian) which also provides translations of these verbs or verbs into Indonesian.

4. Adjective / adjective

Adjectives are adjectives that are used to provide information on nouns or pronouns.

Unlike the previous three speech acts , adjectives do not have another form or type. Examples of adjectives, beautiful, angry, sad, pretty, ugly, handsome. 

Adjectives are one of the things that are difficult to learn, therefore the presence of The Highly Selective Dictionary of Golden Adjectives will really help Sinaumed’s to understand them better.

5. Adverbs / adverbs

As the name implies, adverb functions to provide information.

Adverb Types

Adverbs are divided into several types, viz.

1. Adverb of manner for example, fast, softly, quickly, well, slowly, hard
2. Adverbs of time , for example yesterday, this morning, this afternoon, daily, recently, tonight, early. 
3. Adverbs of degree , for example enough, so, very, too, quite, just, almost.
4. Adverb of frequency for example usually, rarely, always, often, sometimes, barely, daily. 
5. Adverbs of place , for example behind, in, below, above, somewhere, nearby.

6. Prepositions / prepositions

Prepositions have a function to show the relationship between nouns and other words.

6 Types of Prepositions

Prepositions are divided into six types, viz

1. Preposition of time ; after, during, until, since, before.
2. Prepositions of place ; in, on, at, above, under
3. Prepositions of movements ; inside, outside, into, towards, up, off. 
4. Preposition of manner ; without, like, by. 
5. Preposition of purpose ; for
6. Preposition of measure or quantity ; by, for

7. Conjunctions / conjunctions

Conjunctions or conjunctions function to connect two words, phrases, clauses, so that they become a sentence.

3 Types of Conjunctions

Conjunctions are divided into three types, as follows.

1. Coordinating conjunctions , namely conjunctions that connect two grammatical forms that are the same. For example, and, but, yet, or, for, so.
2. Subordinating conjunction , which is a conjunction that connects between the main clause and the subordinate clause. For example, since, although, after.
3. Correlative conjunction , which ispaired conjunction . For example, either-or, between-and, from-to, rather-than, if-then.

8. Interjection / interjection

Interjection is a part of speech that is used to express emotions, usually in the form of words.

For example, oh, hey, oops.

Those are the eight types of parts of speech, which the author has explained in accordance with their meaning, examples and how to use them according to the function of each part of speech . So, before making  part of speech , you should first determine what type of  part of speech you want to make.

Book Recommendations Related to Part Of Speech

Anti Grammar Grammar Book

You want to get to know someone you like better, but you never try to talk to them first. Are you waiting for him to talk to you? Are you sure he will talk to you? The above happened to the grammar. If you don’t have the courage to start, you won’t go anywhere. You will only always be overshadowed by the dream of being good at grammar. So, let’s start learning grammar, shall we?

The Complete Book of Grammar: Powerful Steps to Master Grammar

1. Sentence
2. Part of Speech
3. tenses
4. Passive Voice
5. Modal Auxiliary Verbs
6. Regular & Irregular Verbs
7. Question Tags
8. Gerund
9. Participle
10. Infinitive
11. clause
12. Direct & Indirect Speech
13. Causative Form
14. Elliptical Structure
15. Degrees of Comparison
16. Separable & Inseparable Phrasal Verbs
17. Conditional Sentences
18. Definite & Indefinite Articles
19. Prefixes
20. Basic Vocabularies
21. Slang Languages
22. Daily Conversations

Smart Trick Grammar

This book is also equipped with basic tips for taking the TOEFL Test along with other important information, so that you can be more prepared and confident in facing the TOEFL Test. Packages of practice questions and in-depth discussions in this book give you the opportunity to learn by working on these questions, not by rote. Once you have mastered the material in this book, you can be sure that there is not a single structure problem in the TOEFL Test that you will miss without doing it with confidence, accuracy and correctness.

Benefits of Learning Part of Speech

1. Understand each type of word in English

In addition to understanding English words, by studying speech acts you can make English sentences well. In English to be able to make coherent sentences you need to understand grammar, but for most people learning grammar is a bit more difficult.

2. Understand how to place the word in the right sentence

Therefore speech of act is an alternative that you can learn to help make coherent sentences. In one English sentence, at least three types of speech act are needed, so that one coherent sentence can be formed.

An example is She eats tofu . The sentence consists of three speech acts , namely ‘she’ is a speech act from a pronoun , ‘eat’ is a speech act from a verb or verb, ‘tofu’ is a noun , which is a countable noun .

The sentence is the main sentence or the core of the sentence without a derivative sentence, if you want to make the sentence more detailed then you need the role of another type of speech act , such as you can use a conjunction and add an adverb .

3. Understand the two main forms in English sentences

Studying speech of act can make you understand the two main forms in English sentences. In English, there are verbal sentences or sentences that use verbs and nominal sentences or sentences that use adjectives, nouns and adverbs.

These two sentences are the main forms, in the previous explanation the author has given an example of the sentence she eats tofu . This sentence is a verbal sentence because it has a verb in the sentence, while the nominal sentence, for example, is it was a good meal .

In the previous sentence the author gives an example of she eat tofu as a form of verbal sentence , if you want to change the sentence into a nominal sentence , the verb needs to be changed to a noun .

Eat is the form of the verb if you want to change it into a noun to eat . That way the sentence it was a good meal is a nominal sentence which means it was a good meal.

4. Mastering comprehensive English tenses

The final benefit that the writer can explain from studying speech of act is mastery of comprehensive tenses. Tenses or grammar is the main key to mastering English. There are three main tenses that you need to understand, namely present, past and future tenses. Then active and passive tenses, as well as verbal and nominal tenses.

By understanding the Parts of Speech better, it will be easier for us to understand the meaning when speaking and writing in English. If Sinaumed’s wants to learn it, the book Quickly & Easily Master Parts Of Speech by Suryana Hasan is the right choice.

Examples of Part Of Speech Questions and Discussion

Problem 1

I bought an (expensive) book at the mall.

1. adjectival
2. verb
3. noun
4. conjunction

The answer is a. adjective , because the word ‘expensive’ is an adjective which means expensive.

Problem 2

I’m not ready to get married this (year)

1. adjectival
2. verb
3. noun
4. adverb

The answer is d. adverb , because the word ‘year’ is an adverb that shows a description of time or time.

Problem 3

I haven’t finished my project (because) I’m very busy

1. conjunction
2. verb
3. prepositions
4. noun

The answer is a. conjunction , because the word ‘because’ is a conjunction which is included in the subordinating conjunction , which is a conjunction that connects the main clause with the subordinate clause.

Problem 4

I love (playing) the piano

1. noun
2. verb
3. adverb
4. adjectival

The answer is b.verb , because the word ‘playing’ is an action transitive verb which indicates a verb and is followed by a direct object, namely the piano.

Problem 5

we should (try) new restaurant near my home, they said the food was good.

1. adjectival
2. verb
3. prepositions
4. adverb

The answer is b. verb , because the word ‘try’ is a transitive action verb which indicates a verb and is followed by a direct object , namely new restaurant.

Problem 6

do not try to approach her when she was (mad).

1. adjectival
2. verb
3. prepositions
4. adverb

The answer is a. adjective , because the word ‘mad’ is a synonym of the word ‘angry’ which means angry and shows an adjective.

Problem 7

he brought (his) lunch today

1. pronouns
2. verb
3. prepositions
4. adverb

The answer is a.pronoun , which is a pronoun that shows ownership or possessive pronoun. 

Problem 8

he is the best student ever (in) this school

1. adjectival
2. verb
3. prepositions
4. adverb

The answer is c. preposition , because the word ‘in’ is a preposition that shows the preposition of place , namely school.

Problem 9

(Indonesia) is a big and beautiful country

1. noun
2. verb
3. prepositions
4. adverb

The answer is a. noun , because the word ‘Indonesia’ is a word that specifically indicates the name of a country or is in the form of a proper noun .

Problem 10

I put my bottles (between) my book and my pencils

1. adjectival
2. verb
3. prepositions
4. conjunction

The answer is d. conjunction , because the word ‘between’ is a correlative conjunction in the form of between-and.

Problem 11

take your sister (with) you

1. adverb
2. prepositions
3. conjunction
4. pronouns

The answer is b. preposition , because the word ‘with’ functions to connect nouns with pronouns.

Problem 12

she is (sleepy)

1. adverb
2. prepositions
3. conjunction
4. adjectival

The answer is d.adjective , because sleepy is an adjective that describes the state of the subject.

Problem 13

i will (never) forget you

1. adverb
2. prepositions
3. conjunction
4. adjectival

The answer is a.adverb , because never is a word that describes another verb.

Problem 14

(Matt) is the new manager

1. adverb
2. noun
3. conjunction
4. adjectival

The answer is b. noun , because the words in brackets are included in proper nouns, namely in the form of nicknames or nicknames for someone.

Problem 15

(uh), can we go out of this house now?

1. conjunction
2. adjectival
3. injection
4. verb

The answer is c. interjection, is a word to express emotion.

Those are fifteen examples of questions and their answers along with their discussion. By studying speech acts from this article, it is hoped that it will help you understand each word in English. Because English is different from Indonesian.

English cannot be interpreted one by one, by understanding speech acts you can understand changes in the form of English words, for example the word clever , is a speech act adjective , but if the form is changed to cleverness it changes to a noun or a noun and when it is changed again becomes cleverly then the word becomes an adverb or adverb.

The author hopes that this article can help and increase the reader’s knowledge about part of speech material . Have fun practicing.

Parliamentary is – The system of government is the way in which the country is organized and run. The system of government determines how power is divided and exercised between the government, parliament, and the judiciary. There are several forms of government systems that are commonly used in the world, including presidential, parliamentary, semi-presidential, and federation systems.

A presidential system is one in which the president holds executive, legislative, and judicial powers. The president is directly elected by the people and does not have to retain parliamentary support to remain in power.

A parliamentary system is one in which the parliament holds great powers in controlling the government and making policies. The head of government (the prime minister) is elected by parliament and must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power.

A semi-presidential system is one in which the president holds executive powers and has a considerable role in policy making, while parliament holds legislative powers. Countries that use a semi-presidential system include France and Russia. The federation system is a system of government in which the country is divided into several parts (provinces or states) which have considerable power in regulating regional affairs.

On this occasion, the matter to be discussed is parliamentary. To find out more about parliamentary, then you can see this article, until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s.

What is Parliamentary?

Parliamentary is a system of government in which parliament plays a very important role in controlling the government and making policies. Parliament is made up of a group of democratically elected people whose job is to represent the people and make policies for the country.

In a parliamentary system, the role of parliament is very strong and the government must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power. Parliamentary systems are usually combined with presidential systems, where there is a president who acts as head of state and head of government. However, in a parliamentary system, the head of government is the prime minister who is elected by parliament and must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power. Parliamentary systems are common in European countries, including the United Kingdom, the Netherlands and Germany.

Definition of Parliamentary According to Experts

The following are some definitions of parliamentary according to experts:

1. According to David P. Currie

Parliamentary is a system of government in which the parliament holds great power in controlling the government and making policies.

2. According to William E. Hudson

Parliamentary is a system of government in which the head of government (prime minister) is elected by parliament and must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power.

3. According to JH Burns

Parliamentary is a system of government in which the parliament holds major powers in controlling the government and making policy, and the head of government (the prime minister) is elected by the parliament and must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power.

4. According to David Armitage 

Parliamentary is a system of government in which the parliament plays a very important role in controlling the government and making policy, and the head of government (the prime minister) is elected by the parliament and must maintain the support of the parliament to continue in power.

Parliamentary Government System Structure

In a parliamentary system, the government structure consists of several elements, namely:

1. Parliament

Parliament is an institution consisting of a group of democratically elected people whose job is to represent the people and make policies for the country. Parliament consists of two chambers, namely the People’s Representative Council (DPR) and the Regional Representative Council (DPD).

2. Prime Minister 

The prime minister is the head of government elected by parliament and must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power. The prime minister is responsible to parliament and must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power.

3. Cabinet

The cabinet is a group of ministers who are elected by the prime minister and are responsible to the parliament. The cabinet is responsible for governing and managing government affairs and must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power.

4. President

The president is the head of state who serves as a symbol of the state and has several constitutional powers. The president usually has a more symbolic and less powerful role in parliamentary systems.

5. Supreme Court

The Supreme Court is an institution tasked with adjudicating cases related to the authority of the government and parliament. The supreme court is also responsible for adjudicating cases related to the powers of government and parliament.

Countries that Adopt a Parliamentary System of Government

After knowing the definition of parliamentary and its structure, so that the discussion in this article is more complete, we will also discuss several countries that use a parliamentary system of government.

1. England

England is a country that is famous for its parliamentary system. In England, parliament consists of the House of Representatives (DPR) and the House of Representatives (DPD). The head of government is the prime minister who is elected by parliament and must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power.

2. The Netherlands

In the Netherlands, the parliament consists of the People’s Representative Council (DPR) which consists of 150 democratically elected members. The head of government is the prime minister who is elected by parliament and must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power.

3. Germany

In Germany, the parliament consists of the People’s Representative Council (DPR) which consists of 631 democratically elected members. The head of government is the prime minister who is elected by parliament and must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power.

4. Canada

In Canada, the parliament consists of the House of Representatives (DPR) which consists of 338 democratically elected members. The head of government is the prime minister who is elected by parliament and must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power.

5.Australia

In Australia, parliament consists of the House of Representatives (DPR) which consists of 151 democratically elected members. The head of government is the prime minister who is elected by parliament and must maintain parliamentary support to continue in power.

A Brief History of the Parliamentary System of Government

The history of the parliamentary system of government originates in England, where the first parliament appeared in the 13th century. Initially, the parliament consisted of the People’s Representative Council (DPR) and the State Representative Council (DPD). The DPR is made up of democratically elected members, while the DPD is made up of religious leaders, aristocrats and judges.

In the 17th century, the first Prime Minister, Robert Walpole, emerged as head of government elected by parliament. Walpole held power for 20 years and became the first prime minister to retain parliamentary support for staying in power.

Over the centuries, the British parliamentary system has continued to evolve and become a model for the rest of the world to follow. At the beginning of the 19th century, a parliamentary system began to be implemented in a number of European countries such as the Netherlands, France and Germany. Later, the parliamentary system was adopted by countries that were recognized as British colonies such as Australia, Canada, India, and so on.

Until recently, the parliamentary system has been one of the most common systems of government in the world, and many countries use parliamentary systems, including the United Kingdom, the Netherlands, Germany, Canada, Australia, India, and many other countries.

Learning history is never ending. Through the book Modern Indonesian Political History: Political Studies, Islamic Politics, Democratic Government and Civil Society in Indonesia , readers will find out more deeply about the political history that occurred in Indonesia. Not only that, through this book, readers will also know how to feel the different political nuances in each era, so this book is suitable as a reference for students.

 

The advantages of a parliamentary system of government

As with other government systems, the parliamentary government system also has advantages. What are the advantages of a parliamentary system of government?

1. Responsive to the people

Because parliament consists of democratically elected members, parliamentary systems tend to be more responsive to the wants and needs of the people.

2. High accountability

Because the prime minister and cabinet must maintain parliamentary support to stay in power, parliamentary systems tend to be more accountable than presidential systems.

3. Stable leadership

Because the prime minister must maintain parliamentary support, parliamentary systems tend to be more stable than presidential systems in that the president can be replaced every five years.

4. Ability to overcome crises

Because the prime minister and cabinet must maintain parliamentary support, parliamentary systems tend to be better able to weather crises because the prime minister and cabinet can be replaced as needed.

5. Ease of making policies

Because parliament is in control and makes policy, parliamentary systems tend to make policy easier compared to presidential systems where the president has to negotiate with parliament.

Those are some of the advantages of a parliamentary system of government, but like other systems, a parliamentary system also has disadvantages, for example conflicts can occur between parliament and the government. To find out more clearly about the shortcomings of the parliamentary system of government, they will be discussed below.

Indonesia is a country that adheres to a presidential system in which the government is led by the President. In addition, in the Indonesian government, each member of the Council will be elected using the electoral system. In this electoral system there are parties and parliaments. Then, what is the relationship between elections, parties and parliament? To answer that question, you can find it in the book Party, Elections, and Parliament in the Reform Era. 

Through this book, readers will know the history of the development of elections in Indonesia. So, are you interested in buying this book? Get it immediately by clicking on the book image below.

 

Disadvantages of a Parliamentary System of Government

The parliamentary system of government has several drawbacks, including:

1. Frequent conflicts between parliament and government

Because parliament and government have different powers, conflicts can occur between these two institutions.

2. Unstable government

Because the prime minister must maintain parliamentary support, a parliamentary system can lead to an unstable government if the prime minister or cabinet loses parliamentary support.

3. Slow policy making

Since parliament has to approve policies made by the government, the policy-making process can be slow.

4. Less efficient in dealing with crises 

Due to the slow policy-making process, the parliamentary system can be less efficient in dealing with crises when they occur.

5. Could cause a riot

Decisions taken by the prime minister that are not supported by parliament can lead to political instability and riots.

6. Less effective in solving a problem

The parliamentary system is often seen as less effective at addressing the problems facing the country, as the prime minister is more focused on maintaining support than addressing problems.

Those are some of the shortcomings of the parliamentary system of government. Even so, the parliamentary system is still considered as one of the effective and stable systems of government in the long term.

In the Indonesian parliamentary system, there is a Regional Representative Council or better known as the DPD. Basically, the DPD is a people’s council representing several regions in Indonesia. The book Bicameral Parliament in a Unitary State In a Unitary State This Constitutional Study of the DPD’s presence in the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia can be used as a guide for those of you who want to learn more about the DPD.

https://sinaumedia.com/products/parlemen-bikameral-di-negara-kesatuan?queryID=0b6e15c35e94833a07c14ac921784719

Conclusion

At this time, the parliamentary system is still one of the most commonly used government systems in the world. Many countries use a parliamentary system, including countries in Europe such as the United Kingdom, the Netherlands, Germany and France, as well as countries outside Europe such as Australia, Canada, India and Japan.

Several countries that use a parliamentary system have experienced developments in their parliamentary system over the last few decades. Some countries have increased democracy and people’s participation in the policy-making process, while several other countries have increased government transparency and accountability.

Several countries also carried out reforms in their parliamentary system, such as countries in Europe which experienced changes in the parliamentary election system, changes in the composition of the parliament or changes in the system of electing heads of government. Outside Europe, several countries have developed unique parliamentary systems, such as India which combines a parliamentary system with a federal system and a presidential system.

However, the parliamentary system is still considered one of the most stable and effective systems of government in the long run. However, the parliamentary system also suffers from problems that can lead to political instability, such as conflicts between the parliament and the government, or an unstable government.

So, Sinaumed’s, our article regarding the understanding of what is parliamentary has been completed. After knowing the parliamentary system of government, are you friends, Sinaumed’s interested in paying attention to and studying the various forms of existing government systems?

If sinaumedia friends are interested and want to learn more about the existing forms of government systems, then sinaumedia.com is ready to accompany and fill your reading with books available at sinaumedia. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Mutual

Reference:

• https://id.wikipedia.org/wiki/System_parlementer
• https://katadata.co.id/intan/berita/6202a0360c352/parlementer-Jadi-sistem-Government-ini-pengertian-dan-exemplary

Paraphrasing is a technique used in writing or arguing. This is very useful for making someone’s writing free from copyright infringement or from plagiarism. Paraphrasing is a re-expression of a speech into another speech without changing its meaning.

Usually, the term paraphrase is used to explain that someone makes a piece of writing from another person’s writing, but in their own language.

Even so, an author who paraphrases may not change the content and meaning of the source. In addition, the author must also continue to write down the main sources of ideas written in the bibliography, even though the text is remade in its own sentences.

In paraphrasing, you also have to find the essence of a text that has been read and find problems with this text first. Texts that can be paraphrased include news text, narrative text, advertising text, and so on. Below is a more complete explanation of paraphrasing that you need to know:

Definition of Paraphrase

Paraphrasing as a term comes from the Latin ” paraphrase ” or Greek (Paraphrasein ), with the same meaning, namely “Additional Ways of Expression”. According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), paraphrase or paraphrase is a re-expression of a speech from a level or various languages ​​into another speech without changing the original meaning.

In addition, paraphrasing can also be understood as re-decomposition of a text (composition) in another form (words), with the aim of being able to explain the hidden meaning. Paraphrasing can be regarded as a method used by writers to avoid plagiarism by providing indirect quotations from the original text. What the writer does by using the paraphrasing technique is something that does not violate the law, because the writer will only rewrite the idea in his own words.

The step for paraphrasing is to find the essence of a text that has been read and find various problems in the text. As for a text that can be paraphrased quite a lot, such as narrative text, news text, advertising text, and so on.

Paraphrasing is a technique that can be used both orally and in writing. Oral paraphrasing is a process that expresses the contents of speech orally. Oral paraphrasing technique is then used to practice speaking skills by retelling something in your own language. Meanwhile, paraphrasing is also a process of expressing the contents of speech in writing. This paraphrasing technique in writing itself is done to practice writing skills.

Paraphrasing features

The characteristics of paraphrasing include the following:

1. Paraphrasing has a language utterance that is different from the original text before it is paraphrased.
2. Has a language delivery technique that is different from the original source,
3. The meaning and content of the speech does not change from the original source.

Definition of Paraphrasing According to Experts

Curious about ‘what is paraphrasing’? Let’s find out one by one the meaning of this writing technique according to experts:

According to the Oxford Advanced Learner’s Dictionary

Paraphrasing as a way of expressing what has been written and said by other people using different words so that these words become easier to understand. In other words, quoting that is deliberately done in paraphrasing is a form of citation that uses one’s own words to express the same idea, or is used to maintain the coherence and integrity of the flow of writing.

According to OWL purdue

What is Paraphrasing according to OWL purdue? Paraphrasing is a person’s ability to rewrite other people’s ideas or ideas using their own words to then display them in a new arrangement.

Paraphrasing can also be a legitimate and legal way of borrowing yourself and presenting it in a new form. Paraphrasing according to Owl Purdue is also a more complete and detailed restatement compared to a summary. Paraphrasing itself is valuable because:

• Paraphrasing is better than citing information and a paragraph or writing that is less prominent
• Paraphrasing also helps writers control overquoting
• The mental process required for the success of a paraphrase and assists the writer in fully understanding the meaning of the source text that he will rearrange.

Indonesia Dictionary

Paraphrasing in KBBI is parsing back a text or essay in another form or arrangement of words with the aim of explaining its hidden meaning. In essence, paraphrasing aims to change or divert a form of language into another form of language without changing the meaning or content of the source text.

Paraphrase Type

Paraphrasing is also divided into several types, including:

1. Equivalent paraphrasing

Equivalent paraphrase is a paraphrase between lingual units that have a very close resemblance in meaning. The term equivalent itself is closely related to the technique used by the translator. In their activities, translators look for similar meanings and meanings that are very close to the original text of the first language. This translator does this without looking at word for word or sentence, but from the whole content and meaning of the translated text.

2. Paraphrase the antonym of the circle

Antonym itself means two words that have different meanings. However, in this paraphrase the antonym has a multilevel opposite nature as well as opposites and opposites.

3. Generic-specific paraphrasing

Generic-specific paraphrasing is an activity to paraphrase lingual units by replacing equivalent words that still have the same synonyms. This can happen because a word has meaning and is symbolized by more than one different symbol.

4. Paraphrase amplification

Amplified paraphrases are lingual repetitions and provide additional information in lingual units in the paraphrase. The addition of this information itself is done by providing detailed information from the sentence to be paraphrased.

5. Paraphrase contractions

Contractual paraphrasing is a type of paraphrasing that is done by reducing information in lingual units. This lingual reduction can be done by abbreviating word units without changing the meaning or the phrase.

6. Paraphrase the summary

A summary paraphrase is a type of paraphrasing by summarizing lingual units with other languages. Paraphrasing is different from summarizing. This is because paraphrasing is a technique of presenting source ideas in your own words, while summarizing is an activity to summarize the author’s focus with the arrangement of sentences according to the idea of ​​the first author.

Purpose of Paraphrasing

Paraphrasing has 2 main purposes, namely to avoid plagiarism and to make ideas easier to understand. Explanation of the purpose of paraphrasing is as follows:

1. Avoid plagiarism

Plagiarism as an activity of plagiarizing and violating copyrights, and can be categorized as theft and forgery of other people’s work. Paraphrasing will also prevent the author from practicing plagiarism. By presenting the creator’s idea in your own language, you can be free from plagiarism.

However, of course without changing the content and meaning of the source text. In addition, the author also continues to write down the main sources of ideas that are written in the bibliography, even though this text is reproduced in its own sentences. So, a writer must also enrich the word equivalents and broaden general knowledge in order to be able to develop the contents of the writing by paraphrasing.

2. Ideas are easier to understand

The purpose of the next paraphrase is to make the ideas conveyed easier to understand. Paraphrasing can help redistribute source information in language that is easy for many people to understand. For example, the format of a poem which then presents a lot of complicated dictions can be turned into a narrative using the paraphrasing technique so that the meaning is known later.

Apart from poetry, another example is a novel that can be turned into a drama or film. However, this of course must remain relevant according to the original information. By using the paraphrasing technique, ideas and thoughts can be conveyed properly and more easily understood, even in meetings, conversations, or presentation activities.

Paraphrasing Writing Techniques to Avoid Plagiarism

As explained above, paraphrasing is a legal and legitimate way of using other people’s ideas to create content. However, of course this idea must be developed, so that it becomes unique and interesting content. As mentioned on Purdue’s OWL website , there are six effective writing techniques by paraphrasing, including the following:

1. Re-read the source text until you really understand the contents of the text first.
2. Rewrite ideas and ideas in the text using your own words and different grammar.
3. Make a list of a few words under the paraphrase to help you understand the original text. Write down a few key words that are the theme of the paraphrase.
4. Make sure that the main idea in a paraphrase is still the same as the original article.
5. Also use double quotation marks to identify special terms, terminology, or phrases that you previously borrowed from the original text, and which you took are exactly the same as the original text.
6. Write down sources (including pages) to make it easier for yourself to write down sources or references.

Paraphrase Example

To make it easier to understand what paraphrasing is, you need to know examples of paraphrasing. Here are some examples of paraphrasing, starting from the level of the sentence to the arrangement of the paragraphs:

Example of Paraphrasing in a Sentence

Original sentence; “A writer must be able to organize a job properly so that he can produce quality articles continuously.”

Paraphrase; “To create quality content, a writer must be able to properly organize the tasks assigned to him.”

Example of Paraphrasing in a Paragraph

Original manuscript:

“Bloggers often overreact in using certain keywords in writing an article. As a result, readers become uncomfortable when they read keywords that are mentioned repeatedly in one article.

Paraphrase:

“Because too often repeating a keyword in one blogger article, so it can make readers feel uncomfortable when reading what he wrote”

From all the discussion above, it can be said that paraphrasing is a technique for explaining a text taken from a source using one’s own language. Hopefully all the discussion above can be useful for Sinaumed’s.

Related Books

1. Quick Ways to Write Interesting Theses and Dissertations

Every one of us who wants to study at a tertiary institution generally gets an initial information package about what things we will or should do while studying in the post-graduate study program at that tertiary institution. This information package usually includes a number of things such as the curriculum system and the names and number of courses that are required and can be taken during the study period, the names of the teachers and supervisors of these courses and areas of expertise and academic works. them as well as the forms of scientific work that they must compose, write or produce as a condition for graduating from their studies. The scientific work that is a requirement for graduation is in the form of a thesis, for master’s study programs and a dissertation, for doctoral study programs.

2. Literary Creative Writing and Some Learning Models

Literary Creative Writing and Several Learning Models, consisting of 1 introductory chapter and 3 successive chapters discussing the elements and learning models of writing poetry, short stories and drama scripts. This book is here to bring teachers on adventures and learning situations that prioritize aspects of exploring their own potential. Teachers do not only deal with the material (theory) of language and literature. Teachers are invited to understand Indonesian literature learning activities based on everyday life. Teachers will be more honed to explore students’ literary writing potential with a pleasant learning atmosphere. Andri Wicaksono, M.Pd, graduated with a bachelor’s degree from the Department of Indonesian Language and Literature Education, Yogyakarta State University and a master’s degree from Sebelas Maret State University, Surakarta.

3. The Sakti Book of Short Story Writing: Signs to Look For

Do you like reading short stories? Or even a short story writer? Those who fall in love with the world of writing and always want to write short stories, but there is still a feeling of discomfort in your heart that causes you to be unsure of your own writing. “Short story” is no longer a foreign word in the ears of society in general. Many people know and love to read them, even short stories can entice someone to write them. Then, how do you write a good and correct short story? If you are indeed a short story writer, then you must know the origin of the birth of the short story and recognize the short story even deeper. Find short story formulas for overcoming writing “anxiety”, signs for short story writing that are often violated, to writing tips from famous writers and see how short stories can allow you to study abroad for free!

4. Write Scientific Articles and Essays

One of the activities of a person in communicating thoughts, feelings, or wills to others is writing. Among academics, writing is an activity that is inseparable from their daily activities. Various writings were made, some in the form of scientific articles, some in the form of essays. These two writings have indeed become popular forms for disseminating information, influencing readers’ beliefs, inviting discussion, and even stimulating someone to voice their ideas or ideas which are better in a scientific framework.

Reading books about writing will add to your insight into the world of writing, and can even make yourself accustomed to writing. If you want to find books about writing, you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

The term paradigm is a word that is rarely used in the conversations we have every day. Even so, we still have to understand the true meaning or meaning of this term. So that when the term is used, we can find out what it means or means. In general, this term tends to refer to the world of mindsets or problem-solving techniques that are carried out by people. This term was first introduced by a scientist named Thomas Kuhn through his book entitled The Structure of Scientific Revolution.

When it was first introduced, this term was not clearly explained by Thomas Khun. At that time, paradigm was only explained as the key terminology used in the development model of science. Until a few moments later, the term paradigm was clearly defined by Robert Friedrichs, who was the first to express clearly what a paradigm was.

In essence, this term is closely related to the basic principles that will later determine various kinds of human views of the world as part of the bricoluer system. A paradigm generally includes three main elements, namely elements of methodology, elements of epistemology, and also elements of ontology. By using these three elements, humans use paradigms to gain various knowledge about the world and various phenomena that occur in it.

What is Paradigm?

In training the ability to think, a person must have a paradigm within himself. Because, this is part of the pattern of intellectual discipline. Where a paradigm is a model in the theory of science, you will probably also understand it as a frame of mind. The function of the paradigm is to become the basis for someone to interact with their environment. This is in accordance with the purpose of the paradigm itself, which is to form a frame of mind that approaches and engages with various kinds of things or with other people.

On the other hand, we can also interpret this as a form of a person’s mechanism for looking at something, which will later influence their thinking. In research, paradigm theory can help scientists to work within a broader theoretical framework.

This term itself appeared since the Middle Ages in Continental Europe, to be precise in England. The term, paradigm, is an absorption that comes from the Latin word paradigm, which means a model or pattern. In Greek, paradeigma or para and deiknunai which means to compare, side by side (para), and show (deik).

From the absorption of the Greek language, it can be interpreted that a paradigm is a person’s perspective on himself and also his environment which will influence him in thinking (cognitive), acting (affective), and behaving. In addition, a paradigm can also mean a set of assumptions, concepts, values, and practices that are applied in viewing reality in the same community, especially in intellectual disciplines.

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), a paradigm is a model in scientific theory. Not only that, in everyday conversation, the term paradigm is thinking. Because, a paradigm is the main model, pattern, or method for achieving several types of goals. Often the paradigm is referred to as the most characteristic or basic characteristic of a theory or branch of science.

Understanding Paradigm According to Experts

In order to better understand what a paradigm is, we can refer to the following expert opinions:

1. Thomas Kuhn

Thomas Kuhn was the first to introduce this term through his book entitled The Structure of Scientific Revolution. According to him, the meaning of paradigm itself is a basis for thinking, basic concepts, and also a basis for thinking that is used or adhered to as a model or basic concept for scientists in conducting their studies. In his book, Kuhn mentions that paradigm is the key technology used in the development of science.

2. Robert Friedrichs

Robert Friedrichs was one of the first to clearly define this term. According to him, the notion of a paradigm is a set of values ​​that shape a person’s mindset as a starting point for his views and forms a person’s subjective image of reality. So that it can determine how to deal with this reality.

3. CJ Ritzer

According to CJ Ritzer, the meaning of paradigm is a reference or philosophical basis in the implementation of a motive or goal.

4. Egon G. Guba

According to him, the meaning of a paradigm is a set of basic beliefs that guide human actions in their lives.

5. Harmons

According to Harmon, a paradigm is the most basic way to understand, think, judge, and also do things related to something special about reality.

6. Bakers

According to Baker, a paradigm is a set of rules that establish or define boundaries. Where this term also describes how something must be done within these limits to be successful.

Paradigm in the State

In a state, one of the paradigms that is generally used is the Pancasila paradigm, especially in Indonesia. Pancasila as a paradigm which means making Pancasila a guide in living all aspects of life. This also accompanies various kinds of problems in the life of society, nation and state to achieve national goals.

The Pancasila paradigm will be used in the national development process to improve the quality of Indonesian society which is carried out in a sustainable manner based on national capabilities by taking advantage of advances in science and technology and also taking into account global challenges.

This refers to the personality of the nation as well as universal noble values ​​to be able to create a national life that is independent, sovereign, just, prosperous and advanced with moral and ethical strength. As for one example that makes Pancasila a paradigm, namely during the legal development process.

In the process of developing the law, aspects such as protecting human rights, the existence of a constitutional structure, and also the division of tasks within the constitution must exist. So that Pancasila as a development paradigm has meaning as a basic belief that is used as a guide in planning, implementing, supervising, and the results of national development. Pancasila itself is the basis, guidelines, and also the goal of national development.

Paradigm examples

Referring to the meaning explained above, the following are some examples of paradigms that need to be understood, including:

1. Theoretical Reconstruction Paradigm

Within this paradigm, an existing theory or method is used again in new research but the old method must be relevant for there to be a clear continuity.

2. The Pyramid Paradigm

In this paradigm, a concept or method is carried out in stages, as is the case with various types of pyramids, starting from an inverted, layered, or double pyramid.

3. Qualitative Paradigm

This paradigm is often used in student studies, whether in assignments or theses with qualitative methods. In addition, this paradigm is used to find an overview of inductive social theory.

4. The Empirical Cycle Paradigm

This paradigm is a method or concept that can explain scientific phenomena in which the form is a cycle.

5. The Deduction-Induction Paradigm

Within this paradigm, the focus is more on qualitative methods for deduction, while quantitative methods for induction, which stages through data collection to making conclusions.

Various Paradigms

The following are various paradigms that need to be understood, including:

1. Political Paradigm

The political paradigm is a fundamental and general view that guides a person in thinking and acting in politics.

2. Economic Paradigm

The economic paradigm is the basic view of society regarding the economy and also various things related to it that can direct people to act and think.

3. Social and Cultural Paradigm

This paradigm is a basic philosophical view that directs people to act and think in everyday life.

4. Legal Paradigm

The legal paradigm is the basic view of society towards applicable law. So that it will direct people to think and also act according to the law.

5. Paradigm in the Field of Life between Religions

This paradigm is a basic and general view that directs people to think and act according to their religious teachings and respect one another.

Those are some explanations about the meaning of paradigms, types, and also examples of paradigms that need to be understood. Hope it is useful.

Papuan Traditional Clothing – What comes to your mind when you hear the word Papua? Maybe you will imagine the beauty of Raja Ampat, Mount Carstensz and Jayawijaya Mountains, and honai houses. The discussion on Papua has a very broad scope. On this occasion, we will focus on discussing traditional Papuan clothing. What are the Papuan traditional clothes? Hi loyal Sinaumed’s, let’s not take long and discuss it together directly.

Overview of Papua Island

This exotic island is located at the eastern tip of Indonesia. There are many things that still need to be explored more deeply about Papua. Apart from the copper and gold mines on the island, there are many other interesting things for us to know. This island has a long and tiring history of struggle to the point that the military had to intervene. We know this struggle in history books as the Liberation of West Irian.

This province has an area of ​​312,224.37 km2 out of a total island area of ​​421,981 km2 and is directly adjacent to the state of Papua New Guinea. Previously, this area was known as Irian Jaya to mention the entire territory of Papua Island. However, since 2003, this island has been divided into two provinces, namely West Papua in the west and Papua (only) in the east. So if we say Papua, then what is meant is the Province of Papua which is in the eastern part of Papua Island. Papua Province has its capital in Jayapura City.

Culture in Papua Island

We got various information about the number of tribes on the island of Papua, but most said that there were around 466 tribes living there. They are of the same family as the indigenous people of the Australian Continent, namely the Aborigines. Among the tribes in Papua are the Asmat, Biak, Nafri, Sentani, Batu/Island Wood, Tobati/Enggros, Demta, Kaureh, Kimaghama, Maklew, and others.

Of these various tribes, there are more than 270 languages ​​on the island of Papua. Meanwhile in Papua New Guinea, there are also various tribes and it is said that there are 800 languages ​​there. Culture in Papua includes dances, houses, ceremonies and traditional clothing.

Types of Papuan Traditional Clothing

There are many kinds of traditional clothes in Papua. One of them is the Koteka which we often hear because of the many reports on television programs and news. Apart from the Koteka, there are several other types of Papuan traditional clothing. Before we study the different types, it’s a good idea to know the characteristics of Papuan traditional clothing.

As we know, Papuan traditional clothing has not been influenced by outside culture so it is still very original and genuine. Papuan traditional clothing indicates that its inhabitants live side by side with the natural surroundings. The uniqueness of Papuan traditional clothing makes their traditional clothing known in Indonesia and internationally.

Below are the types of Papuan traditional clothing.

1. Koteka

The koteka is part of the traditional Papuan clothing which functions to cover the genitals of indigenous Papuan men, while other body parts are left open so that they are almost naked. Koteka literally means clothes. Koteka is also known as horim or bobbe.

Koteka is made from water gourd skin that has had its seeds and fruit removed. The water pumpkin chosen must be old because old pumpkin when dried has a hard and durable texture. The old pumpkin is planted in sand or soil and then burned to make it easier to remove the seeds and fruit. After successfully removing the seeds and fruit, the pumpkin is dried by airing it over the fireplace.

The shape is long like a sleeve and the tip is tapered like a cone or more like a carrot stick. At the end of the koteka are given partridge feathers or bird feathers.

Koteka is applied to the male vital parts. So that it is not easily separated, there are ropes on the left and right so that the koteka can be wrapped around the user’s waist. For men who are still virgins, the koteka is worn in an upright position. Meanwhile for men who wear the koteka in an upward position and tilted to the right, it symbolizes virility and has a high social status or nobility.

The general opinion in circulation says that the size, both long and large, of the koteka symbolizes the status of the wearer. But in reality this is not the case. The size of the koteka is chosen based on what activity is being carried out.

Short koteka is worn when they work and daily activities such as farming, hunting and raising livestock. Meanwhile, for traditional events, they use a long koteka.

The koteka worn by one tribe can be different from the koteka worn by other tribes. For example, the koteka used by the Yali tribe, they prefer the long shape of a pumpkin. Meanwhile, there are other tribes, namely the Triom tribe, who usually wear a koteka in the shape of two pumpkins.

In 1950, the indigenous Papuans received a visit to socialize the use of shorts. This campaign aims to replace the role of the koteka so that it can cover the male vital parts more thoroughly.

The campaign required a long struggle and was not easy. Residents in the Baliem Valley, for example, the Dhani Tribe, sometimes wear shorts, but at other times they maintain the koteka.

Gradually, the use of the koteka was limited, especially in public places where many people could see it, for example at schools, terminals, offices, and so on. Some time ago, news went viral that the use of the koteka was banned in courtrooms. The existence of koteka in this era is more often traded for souvenirs.

The use of koteka is still common in mountainous areas, such as Wamena. If there are tourists who take pictures with residents using the koteka, usually they need to pay several tens of thousands according to the agreement.

The restriction on this koteka began in 1964 when the antikoteka campaign began. Then in 1971, clothes and trousers were distributed to the residents there. Unfortunately, the distribution was not accompanied by the provision of laundry soap, so the clothes and trousers that were already worn became dirty and were never washed. As a result, many Papuans are affected by skin diseases.

2. Shirt Kurung

The baju kuning is a traditional Papuan dress worn by women as a boss. The material for the brackets is velvet. The baju kuning is influenced by cultures outside of Papua and is widely worn by women in Manokwari. You will find many Papuan women in West Papua who also wear this dress for traditional events.

This woman wearing a bracketed shirt combines her appearance with a tassel skirt. It is not uncommon for women to use additional accessories when wearing this bracketed shirt. Fringed fur trim around waist, arms and neckline.

The combination of baju kuning, tassel skirt, and feather tassel decoration is usually added with several other accessories to make it look more harmonious. There are bracelets and necklaces made of hard seeds and head coverings made of bird feathers.

3. Tassel Skirt

The tassel skirt is a subordinate that covers the lower body of Papuan women. Usually the tassel is used in pairs with the clothes brackets. The tassel skirt is made of sago leaves that have been dried and then neatly knitted to form a skirt.

Tassel skirts are usually worn by residents in the central mountainous region or near the coast. Some groups that still use this tassel skirt are Yapen, Sentani, Enjros, Nafri, Biak Numfor, and Tobati.

Even though skirts are generally worn by women, some men in Papua also wear these fringed skirts when traditional events are held. Even though there weren’t that many, Sinaumed’s shouldn’t be surprised when he saw this during his visit to Papua.

How to use a tassel skirt for women and men is different. If a man wears a fringed skirt, then he doesn’t wear a baju kuning like a woman. If a man wears a koteka, women usually wear a tassel skirt without brackets. Their upper bodies are disguised by tattoos with flora and fauna motifs in which the ink is made from natural materials.

4. Sali clothes

To recognize a girl is single or married, can be recognized by the clothes worn. Sali clothes are clothes that only girls can wear. This Sali shirt can be used to carry out daily activities. Married women are not allowed to wear this traditional dress.

Sinaumed’s would not have thought that these clothes were made from selected tree bark or dried sago leaves. One of the criteria is that the bark of the tree must be brown so that the clothes produced look perfect, attractive and pleasing to the eye. Because at first glance, this traditional dress looks like stitched cloth when worn by Papuan girls.

Sali is used by wrapping it around the body and arranged so that the inside is longer than the outside.

5. Yokal Traditional Clothing

Who would have thought that there were only clothes for girls who were still girls? In Papuan culture, married women are also provided with special clothing. Its function is clear, this garment is to cover a woman’s upper body and may only be worn by those who are married.

Yokal clothes are made of tree bark which is a striking earthy brown or reddish color. These clothes are made by woven and wrapped around the woman’s body.

6. Grass Cloth Dress

This traditional clothing is clothing that has received a modern touch. Grasscloth clothes can be worn by both men and women.

This clothing is made using the basic ingredients of dried sago leaves. Sago leaves that are used as an ingredient must be taken when the sea water is high tide. The sago leaves that have been taken are then dried and then soaked before being woven.

The leaves are then woven using a one meter long piece of wood. The wood serves to tie the ends of the rope. The rope is made of grass, which has previously been dried, which is twisted together.

7. Natural Tattoos

It is not uncommon for us to encounter pictures or tattoos on the bodies of Papuans. The tattoo serves to cover the upper body of the Papuan population. This is because sometimes Papuans don’t wear tops.

According to historical records, tattoos in Papua are estimated to have existed since 3000 years ago. It was the Austronesian people from Asia who brought this tattoo tradition to Papua. That said, the tattoo was made of charcoal made from wood that is pyrolyzed together with tree sap.

When the mixture of sap and charcoal is sufficient to be mixed with other ingredients, sago thorns or bones are dipped into it to be stabbed into the cheeks, chest, eyelids, calves, back of the body, and hips.

Tattoos are also used by grooms to make them look more handsome and mighty. Therefore, tattoos on men have motifs of crocodiles, snakes, cassowaries, or sawfish. While the bride wears tattoos to add beauty. Tattoo motifs for the bride are usually birds of paradise, eels, or fish. In addition, tattoos are also used to show a symbol of beauty, power, or one’s social status.

8. Tassel decoration on the head

The tassels on the head like a crown are often worn by the people of Papua. The function of this tassel decoration is as an additional decoration for traditional Papuan clothing.

This tassel decoration is made of white or yellow cassowary feathers. The choice of cassowary feathers as a tassel decoration material is because of its unique and attractive shape. Sometimes this decoration is also combined with rabbit fur. But sometimes cassowary feathers are replaced with reeds as the basic ingredient.

9. Noken

Noken is a traditional Papuan clothing accessory in the form of a typical Papuan woven bag. Previously, this bag was worn by tying it on the head. But lately, noken is worn by slung over the shoulder. Noken is made by plaiting bark or rattan roots.

Noken has many important functions in the lives of people in Papua. Yatoo is a large noken that can be used to carry firewood, vegetables, tubers, beans, potatoes, and other goods, including groceries at the market. If the Yatoo is empty, the bag can be used to carry a child. Another type of noken is called Gapagoo. Due to its small size, Gapagoo can only transport small items such as cigarettes or betel nut.

Until now, noken is still widely used by the Asmat tribe. Noken is a matter of pride for Papuans who migrate outside the island or Indonesians who migrate abroad. In the market Noken has a high price. These woven bags are priced from hundreds of thousands to millions of rupiah.

10. Teeth of Pigs or Dogs

As the name suggests, these accessories are made of dog teeth and pig teeth. This pig’s tooth is placed between the nostrils of a Papuan man. This pig’s tooth is used as an identity that the user is a war soldier. If a soldier is angry or wants to fight, then the pig’s teeth will face down.

While dog teeth are used for jewelry in the form of necklaces. This necklace made of dog teeth is called Koyonoo. That said, dog teeth are one of the highest treasures in tradition in Papua. Dogs that are white and without blemishes (cracked or eroded) have a higher exchange value.

In some tribes, Koyonoo can be used to pay customary fines, dowry, and several other means of exchange.

So much of Papuan culture is still a mystery to us. The various cultures that belong to the Indonesian nation should be addressed wisely. Thus, we can make these differences to unite the nation, not divide the nation.

Finally, Sinaumed’s, we have finished our discussion regarding Papuan traditional clothing. sinaumedia never tires of being #Friends Without Borders by presenting our selected books.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

What is paid-up capital – Since ancient times, capital has always been an important part
of a business. Good capital in the form of money, time, creativity, even passion.
This departs from the definition of capital in KBBI which means: (a) property (money, goods, and so
on) that can be used to produce something that adds to wealth or (b) goods that are used as a basis or
provision for work.

Of all the types of capital, money capital is inevitably the most crucial because it will relate to
operations and the future of the business. Even so important, the law also regulates the
provision of this capital.

For example, if you want to set up a Limited Liability Company (PT), you must prepare three types of
capital, namely authorized capital, issued capital and paid-up capital. Unfortunately, there
are still many people who do not understand about these three types of capital, even though by understanding
them, the possibility for a business to grow is greater.

Therefore, in this article we will discuss one of the three capitals, namely paid-up capital.
This is because paid-up capital is important to support and ensure that the company
operates.

Definition of Paid-up Capital

To understand what paid-up capital is, you must first know about authorized capital. Rudhi
Prasetya (in Sulin, 2008) says that the authorized capital is the entire nominal value of the maximum shares
that can be issued by a Limited Liability Company. In other words, it is the total number of
shares a company can issue.

Then, what is meant by paid-up capital? Paid-up capital, in short, is shares that actually
exist (real) and have been deposited into the company with a minimum amount of shares issued which must be
fully paid up and proven by valid proof of deposit.

Legitimate deposits here can be in the form of proof of shareholder deposits into a bank account in the name of
the Company, financial statement data that has been audited by an accountant, or the Company’s balance sheet
which has been signed by the Directors and Board of Commissioners.

Furthermore, in the book Theory & Practice of Limited Liability Companies , Rudhi
Prasetya explains that paid-up capital can be considered as company assets which serve as collateral for
creditors or third parties who enter into a legal agreement with the company.

Legal Basis of Paid-up Capital

The Indonesian government, through Law Number 40 of 2007 concerning Limited Liability Companies or commonly
referred to as the Company Law, regulates and oversees the paid-in capital participation system.

In this Law there are around 161 articles which completely and in detail regulate the mechanism for the
establishment of a limited liability company. This includes discussions regarding capital and
terms of participation.

If Sinaumed’s wants to study the legal basis of paid-up capital even further, RI Law No.
40 of 2007 & RI Presidential Regulation of 2014 concerning Limited Liability
Companies compiled by the Citra Umbara Team can be the main
source. This book provides a complete explanation of the Limited Liability Company
Law.

Paid-up Capital Provisions

In Law no. 40 of 2007 concerning Limited Liability Companies, it is stipulated that a company
must have an authorized capital of IDR 50 million. Now, from this nominal, 25 percent must be
placed and fully paid whose deposit is proven by valid proof of deposit.

This means, if you want to set up a Limited Liability Company, then you must deposit a capital of IDR 12.5
million as evidenced by valid proof of deposit.

In addition, another provision regarding paid-up capital states that if there is an issuance of shares by the
company, then the company must pay it in full.

Types of Paid-up Capital

Basically, paid-up capital is money, but it can also take other forms. So, this other form
that is deposited must be able to be valued in money, the value of which is estimated by independent experts
or those who are not affiliated with the company.

In addition, paid-up capital can also be in the form of: (1) share capital which is a nominal amount of
money or shares outstanding; or (2) Agio and Disagio shares which are the difference between
the amount deposited to the shareholders and the real nominal value of the shares held.

Agio itself is a term that refers to the difference whose value is above normal. Meanwhile,
disagio is a term whose value is below the original value.

How to Deposit Capital

Regarding the deposit of capital into the company, Law no. 40 of 2007 Article 3 stipulates
that this capital deposit cannot be made in installments or must be paid in full in the amount of the issued
capital and must be made during the process of submitting an application for approval.

At least 25% of the authorized capital must have been issued and fully paid up, and further issuance of shares
made each time to increase the issued capital must be paid in full when submitting an application for company
authorization accompanied by valid proof of deposit.

Meanwhile, for depositing capital in other forms during the establishment process, it can be done by including
the capital in an authentic deed where the deed is placed in the deed of establishment.

Article 34 paragraph (1) Law no. 40 of 2007 states that the deposit of shares in the form of
immovable objects must be clearly stated regarding the amount, price, type or type, status, domicile, and
other things that are deemed necessary.

So, the method of determining fair value is first adjusted to the existing market value. If
there is no market value, then the fair value will be determined by a valuation technique that is most
suitable for the characteristics of the deposit based on the best and relevant information.

Meanwhile, the independent expert referred to here is an expert who:

1. Has no biological family relationship or is married to employees, members of the Board of Directors, Board
   of Commissioners or shareholders of the Company.
2. Has no relationship with the company due to the similarity of one or more members of the board of directors
   or the board of commissioners.
3. Does not have a controlling relationship with the company either directly or indirectly.
4. Does not have a share ownership relationship in the company of 20% or more.

It doesn’t stop there, the deposit of immovable objects must also be announced in at least 2 newspapers published
in the company’s jurisdiction or it can also be in national-scale media.

That way, if anyone has any objections regarding the deposit of immovable objects into this company, they
can be immediately known. This announcement must be made a maximum of 14 days after the deed of
establishment of the legal company is signed.

Example of Paid-up Capital

So that Sinaumed’s understands more about paid-up capital, here is an example of a case of paid-up capital in a
company which can give you a little picture.

Let’s say Andri and Bintang agree to build PT. XYZ. Then in this establishment,
both of them agreed to start with an authorized capital of IDR 200 million and be divided into 2,000 shares.
So, each share has a value of IDR 100,000.

So, from the initial capital of IDR 200 million, it turns out that those from Andri and Bintang only
reached a total of IDR 100 million. Even then, only IDR 75 million or 75% can be paid.

The IDR 100 million is issued capital and the remaining IDR 25 million and is not yet owned by anyone is
referred to as portfolio shares or shares that have not been issued. This type of shares can be
issued at any time if the company needs issued capital which must be paid in full or cannot be paid in
installments.

In other words, Andri and Bintang, who had just deposited Rp. 75 million, were still required to pay off the
remaining Rp. 25 million in accordance with the principle of paid-up capital.

Addition and Reduction of Paid-in Capital

After running, a company can increase capital or reduce capital if necessary. However,
according to Article 21 paragraph 1 of the 2007 Company Law, additions and reductions in company capital are
categorized as changes in certain AD. In addition, according to Article 19 paragraph 1 every
amendment to the AD must be determined by the General Meeting of Shareholders (GMS).

This means that the addition or reduction of capital in a company must be based on the prior approval of
the GMS. The provisions for increasing authorized capital in the Limited
Liability Company Law book written by Yahya Harahap are as follows:

1. Increase in capital based on the GMS
approval

1. The quality and nature of the GMS of paid-up capital is not categorized as a GMS for changing AD but is the
   same as an ordinary GMS as regulated in article 86 of the 2007 Limited Liability Company Law
2. Therefore, GMS decisions can only become valid if:

• The GMS is held with a quorum of attendance of more than ½ (one half) of the total number of shares with
  voting rights
• Approved by more than ½ (one half) of the total number of votes cast, unless otherwise specified in the AD.

1. Required to notify the additional paid-in capital to the Minister so that it can be recorded in the Company
   Register and to be announced by the Minister and TBN RI.

2.
Increase in capital by first offering all issued shares to each shareholder

The company can also increase capital by offering shares that have been issued to increase capital to each
shareholder in accordance with the following rules:

a. Offer of shares of the same
classification

For this type of shares with the same classification, the provisions are regulated in Article 43 paragraph
(1) which requires that all shares issued for the purpose of increasing capital are first offered to each
shareholder and; The offer must also be balanced with share ownership for the same
classification

b. Share
classification offering that has never been issued

If the shares to be used to increase capital are shares that have never been issued, then according to
Article 43 paragraph (2) all shareholders who have the right to purchase said shares first;
then the method of purchase must be in accordance with the balance of the number of shares owned by
the prospective buyer.

c.
Unnecessary issuance of shares offered to shareholders

In Article 43 paragraph (3) UUPT 2007 there are also several provisions that can abort the obligation to offer
shares issued to increase capital to shareholders, such as if the issuance of shares:

1. Addressed to company employees

The meaning of “shares addressed to employees of the company” in Article 43 paragraph (3) letter a is shares
issued in the framework of the Company’s Employee Stocks Option Program (ESOP) including all the rights and
obligations attached to them.

2. Addressed to bondholders

Shares addressed to bondholders or other securities that can be converted into shares and have been issued with
the approval of the GMS

3. Conducted
with the aim of reorganization or restructuring with the approval of the GMS

So, what is meant by reorganization or restructuring here is a merger, takeover, consolidation, separation, or
compensation of receivables.

d.
Offer the remaining shares that are not subscribed by shareholders to third parties

Article 43 paragraph (4) allows the company to offer the remaining shares that are not subscribed by
shareholders to third parties. With a note that if the shareholders do not exercise their right
to buy and pay in full for the shares that have been purchased within fourteen days from the date of the
offer.

In addition, an offer of shares to a third party can only be made if within fourteen days the shareholder does
not exercise his right to take part from other shareholders.

3. Reduction of paid-in capital

Reducing paid-in capital can be done by withdrawing the shares that have been issued by the company to be deleted
or by reducing the nominal value of the shares.

However, these methods can only be realized based on valid GMS decisions and in accordance with the requirements
of the quorum provisions and must also be approved by the Minister.

Once approved, the Board of Directors must notify the GMS decision to reduce this capital to all creditors.
This notification is made in the form of an announcement which is published in one newspaper or
more no later than seven days after the date of the resolution of the GMS.

That way, the creditors will know that the company will make paid-in capital expenditures. So
if someone feels that their interests have been harmed, the creditor can file a lawsuit with the District
Court.

Furthermore, the technical reduction of paid-up capital has been regulated in article 44 paragraph (1) and
article 47 of the 2007 Company Law by:

a. Share recall

This method means that shares that have been issued are withdrawn from circulation in order to reduce
paid-up capital. Shares that have been issued here mean shares that have been bought back by
the Company or shares that meet the classification to be recalled. Once withdrawn, the shares
will “disappear” from circulation.

b. Decrease in nominal value of
shares

In this second method, the nominal value of the shares is reduced without repayment to the shareholders which,
according to Article 47 paragraph (3) of the 2007 Company Law, must be carried out in a balanced manner to all
shares of each class of shares.

However, this balance can be waived if all the shareholders whose par value is reduced agree.
If there is more than one classification of shares whose nominal value has been reduced, then a GMS
decision regarding reducing paid-in capital can only be taken after obtaining approval from all shareholders
of each classification of shares whose rights have been impaired.

From the discussion above, what is paid-up capital are shares that do exist (real) and have been deposited
into the company with a minimum number of shares issued which must be fully paid up and proven by valid
proof of deposit. Thus the discussion of paid-up capital, I hope all the discussion above is
useful for you.

If you want to find various kinds of books about capital, then you can get them at
sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always
provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Gilang Oktaviana Putra

Packaging – Sinaumed’s must be familiar with packaging, right? Yep, packaging, aka the packaging for a product, has various types depending on its contents. It’s even possible that Sinaumed’s has designed a packaging intended for a product, whether it’s at school or when working as it is today. Its existence, which is generally a container for a product, cannot be separated from human life.

Packaging produced by a large company or industry usually needs to go through several stages first, especially to determine the design and color. This is not only related to its function as a container but it also has an impact on the psychology of prospective consumers. Therefore, each container of a product is not only made based on trends, but needs to consider many things. So what exactly is packaging? Why should it be considered in such a way when its basic function is only as a container? What is the history of its development so that it can be as varied as it is today?

So, so that Sinaumed’s isn’t confused, let’s look at the following review!

Definition of Packaging

Based on KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary), packaging is a protective wrap in a product and comes from the results of packaging activities . This turns out to be directly related to creative design which is based on human creativity. According to Klimchuk and Krasovec (2006), revealed that packaging is a creative design that relates to shape, structure, material, color, image, typography, and design elements accompanied by product information itself so that it can be easily marketed.

The term “packaging” comes from the basic word “package” which means neatly arranged (wrapped). In the world of commerce, packaging can be interpreted as a protective cover for commercial products. Even though it’s only as a product protective wrap, its existence is not a joke, you know … Because the container must be able to influence consumers to give a positive response and be willing to buy the product. Therefore, the ultimate goal of packaging activity is to create a sale.

Packaging is even often referred to as “ the silent sales-man/girl ”, because its presence acts as if it represents the absence of the waiter in indicating the quality of the product. However, in order for a container to be called that, it must have information that is able to communicate between the seller (company) and the buyer (as a consumer). In fact, many marketing experts say that the existence of a container design can be the charm of a product (the product charm) , because packaging is basically at the final stage of a production process. Since the container is at the final stage of production, its form must also be eye -catching as well as usage attractiveness .

Until now, there are three main reasons why companies or production factories carry out packaging activities, namely:

• Meet the safety and benefit requirements, which are able to protect the product from anything (including damage due to weather) on the way from the producer to the consumer.
• Can carry out marketing programs, because it is effective as a way for companies to differentiate their products.
• Can increase company profits, especially if the manufacture is done as attractive as possible.

 

 

 

History of Packaging Development

Does Sinaumed’s know that this packaging activity has existed since 8000 BC? Yep, at that time it was still in ancient times so the packaging was done naturally, namely using natural materials in the form of clay, animal skins, leaves, bamboo reeds, banana stems, and many more. Then, how did it develop so that various product containers today can be interesting to look at? Well, here are the reviews!

Early History of Packaging

The early history of packaging design is said to have started from 8000 BC, when humans already owned goods and thought of covering and storing them using natural materials such as woven grass, tree bark, leaves, shells, and many more. Since at that time humans were able to think that their products or goods had to be stored in such a way so as not to spoil, they used the hollow part of the pumpkin and the animal bladder as the basic vessel.

Gradually, the use of bottles, jars and earthen jars as containers for their products grew.

History of Writing on Packaging

The existence of writing that exists today does not just exist, but goes through its development first. Sumerian symbols or pictographs were allegedly a written language communication which then developed over time, namely to become syllable symbols so that they could be used as communication by many cultures for almost 2000 years.

Furthermore, the Semitic language which originated from the ancient Phoenician culture developed a single sound symbol to become an alphabet. These symbols in ancient times were also used to identify the container of a product even though the packaging was still simple, which was to identify social identity (who), ownership (who owned it), and origin (who made it).

The Beginning of Inclusion of the Trademark on the Packaging

After the transition from the Middle Ages to the modern world, namely the Renaissance, the concept of graphic design emerged. In 1500, a paper miller named Andreas Bernhard became the first person to put their name (as a trademark) on their products with a printed container. The packaging which is also the wrapper is said to be the first packaging design in the world.

Industrialization Period

In the 18th century, the European region experienced massive commercial expansion, accompanied by high urban growth as well as a widespread distribution of wealth. Not only that, the marketing of body care products has also increased and even the design of containers for soap products also reflects the value of luxury. At that time, wooden boxes and fiber bags were used as the main materials for packaging.

Due to the increasing demand for goods from consumers, the development of cans, glass, aluminum and paper bags as basic materials for packaging is also growing. Furthermore, in 1798, Nicholas Louis Robert succeeded in finding a paper-making machine so that he could produce paper more quickly and at a lower price. Then, in 1817, commercial cardboard boxes were also made for the first time in England until they developed into corrugated cardboard with a more durable quality.

New Economic Age

Around the 19th century, production and distribution methods emerged in terms of packaging. Precisely in 1899, Henry G. Eckstein managed to create a wax-coated container that provides a golden opportunity for manufacturers to continue to distribute their products and keep fresh for a long time.

20th century

In 1906, the Federal Food and Drugs Act appeared which prohibited counterfeit labels or writing that did not match the contents of the product. The legislation became the first regulation to discuss container design. Furthermore, the use of aluminum foil was also developed, especially when the first aluminum factory was opened in Switzerland in 1910. The use of aluminum foil as a container proved to be effective in protecting food products and medicines from outside influences.

Packaging Design Business Development

In the early 1930s, the existence of product containers developed into a major industry. Even some industrial companies set up a special department to develop product containers. Then followed by the presence of advertising agencies that provide design services.

Appears Consumer Protection Rules

In 1962, the US president, JF Kennedy, addressed his congress for the first time discussing consumer protection. In his speech, he acknowledged that consumers have the right to security, choice of information, freshness, and comfort. As a result, many countries also regulate consumer protection, one of which is Indonesia.

Advances in Design

Due to the development of science in the technical field and scientific knowledge, of course it will affect the progress of material and container technology. Starting from small candy boxes, freeze dried powder, aluminum tubes that can be squeezed, to beverage packaging made of laminated foil. Developments in terms of product containers are considered capable of providing protection, convenient access, and making products (especially food) more durable.

Then in the 1990s, many product containers included their trademarks. At that time, companies also realized that there was a greater need for product containers so they began to set up a special team as part of marketing to develop products as well as design packaging. Until finally in the 21st century as it is today, many product containers have developed with colors, typography and shapes that are increasingly unique but do not abandon their basic function, which is to protect the product so that it lasts longer.

Packaging Function

Basically, packaging functions as a product container so that it lasts longer. However, it turns out that with the development of the times, the existence of packaging does not only function that way but also as a promotional tool. Well, here is the function of the packaging of a product.

1. Packaging Protective Function

This function is related to protection or product security from things that might damage the product. Starting from climate weather, dust, bacteria, and many others. From the existence of this product container, it is hoped that it can minimize damage and the risk of defects in the product, which can be detrimental to both the buyer and the seller.

2. Promotional Functions of Packaging

According to Kotler (1999), the packaging of a product fulfills four functions, one of which is as a marketing tool.

• Self Service : product packaging can function to emphasize the characteristics of a product to be sold. Therefore, each product will definitely have a different form of packaging.
• Consumer Affluence : consumers are considered willing to pay even more for the convenience, appearance, and prestige of a product’s packaging.
• Company and Brand Image : packaging is a company brand image, aka corporate identity so that it can be better known by the public.
• Innovation Opportunity : Innovative product packaging is proven to be able to provide benefits to consumers as well as benefit the company.

General Functions of Packaging

1. To protect the product from damage, whether caused by biological, chemical or physical factors.
2. Facilitate delivery and distribution.
3. Easy product storage.
4. Makes it easy to count, especially when going through the bulk packing stage.
5. Means of information as well as promotion of the products sold.

Packaging Classification

Based on Content Structure

1. Primary Packaging

That is, the packaging materials directly accommodate the products, usually food ingredients in the form of milk cans, drink bottles, and others.

2. Secondary Packaging

Namely those used to protect primary packaging so that no damage occurs to the product. Example: cardboard, cardboard, rope, plastic, and others.

3. Tertiary Packaging

Namely those used to protect secondary packaging, especially when shipping products to long distances. Example: wood, cardboard, and others.

Based on Usage Frequency

1. Disposable Packaging

Namely the type that is immediately thrown away after opening in order to use the product. For example plastic wrap, leaf wrap, and others.

2. Reusable Packaging (Multi Trip)

Namely those that are usually not discarded directly by consumers, but will be reused. In fact, usually, companies will provide products in the form of refills to support this reuse. Examples: drink bottles, soy sauce bottles, floor cleaning bottles, and others.

3. Semi Disposable Packaging

Namely the type that will usually be used again for other purposes. In this container, companies rarely provide refill products for the same product. For example biscuit tins that can be reused as rengginang containers.

Based on Readiness Level

1. Ready-to-use packaging

Namely the type that has packaging materials to be ready to be filled with perfect forms, especially after leaving the factory. Example: bottles and cans.

2. Ready-to-assemble packaging

Namely those that still require the assembly process before being filled with products. Example: cans that are still in the form of flexible plates and cylinders.

Know What Is a Packaging Label

Previously, it was mentioned that there is a label which is usually listed with the trademark on the packaging. According to Kotler and Armstrong (2001), labels on packages can vary, from simple product identification to nutritional information graphics. At the last level, labels can identify products or trademarks.

Not only that, the label can also explain things related to the product, regarding who made it, where it was made, when it was made, how the contents of the product are formed, how the product is used, and when it expires.

Color function in packaging

Does Sinaumed’s realize that there are various colors on product packaging? Yep, color is an important aspect of packaging design and can even have a psychological impact on consumers. Consumers are considered to identify the color on the packaging first, then see the writing that contains product information. The use of the right color can allegedly attract attention and make it possible to differentiate from competitors, especially when placed on a retail shelf.

In the color association concept applied to product containers, each color is able to describe and communicate information to consumers. Here are some color associations that can be applied to product containers.

• The red color is very often used in product containers because it attracts the attention of consumers. This color represents the intensity of a taste (roasted, spicy, hot) or the richness of a fruity taste such as strawberry, apple and cherry.
• The color orange, can communicate a strong brand and the energy for information will taste fresh, spicy, or fruity.
• The yellow color in the product case is very stimulating to the eyes so it is very eye-catching. In food products, this yellow color is often used to communicate the presence of a citrus taste or the presence of butter.
• The green color in product containers is usually to represent mint, tamarind, apple and lime flavors. However, the green color can also indicate that the product is beneficial to health.
• The color purple is usually used for product containers and communicates the flavors of berries, such as grapes and blueberries.

So, that’s a review of what packaging is and the history of its development so that it can progress as it is today.

Pacific Plate – On the earth itself it consists of various kinds of plates, one of the plates on earth is the Pacific plate. In fact, this Pacific plate passes through Indonesian territory. The Pacific plate is also known as the Pacific Ring of Fire. Then, what exactly is meant by the Pacific plate? Check out the full review below, You.

The theory of plate tectonics

The theory of plate tectonics or in English is also called Plate Tectonics is a major theory in a field of geology which is then developed in order to provide an explanation of the existence of evidence of movement on a large scale that is carried out naturally by the earth’s lithosphere.

In addition, this theory includes and replaces several theories of continental drift. The theory of continental drift itself was expressed more or less in the 20th century which was accompanied by the concept of seafloor spreading which was also developed around the 1960s.

So, the outermost part of the earth is formed by two layers. The top layer is the lithosphere which consists of the crust and at the very top is the earth’s mantle which is dense and rigid inside.

Then, at the bottom of the asthenosphere’s lithosphere layer, although it is solid, it can still flow like a very slow liquid. In addition, if you use the geological time scale, then the time is very long. This is because of the viscosity and also the very low shear strength.

If you look deeper, the layers of the lithosphere are further divided into tectonic plates . There are also seven main plates and many smaller ones on Earth. These plates ride on the asthenosphere. They move relative to one another at plate boundaries, either divergently (away), convergently (collide), or transform (sideways).

Earthquakes, as well as volcanic activity, mountain building, and oceanic trench formation can all occur in areas along plate boundaries. The lateral movement of the plates is usually between 50–100 mm/a

About the Pacific Plate

The Pacific Plate is the largest of the 7 major tectonic boundaries. This plate has a size of 102,900,000 km2 or twice the size of the South American Plate. The Pacific Plate itself is on the seabed of the Pacific Ocean.

When talking about the Pacific plate, it cannot be separated from what is called plate tectonics. In plate tectonics, there are so-called odd plate tectonics. The name arises because these plates generally consist of oceanic crust and also continental crust. The example is on the Pacific plate that underlies the Pacific Ocean with the Hawaiian Islands positioned in the middle.

Back again to the Pacific plate. The Pacific plate stretches from the west coast of North America to Alaska. Then, on the western edge, this plate extends to the east coast of the islands of Japan and Indonesia.

Not only that, most of the Pacific Ring of Fire was formed because of the Pacific plate. This Pacific plate has a horseshoe pattern, so that on this plate earthquakes and volcanic eruptions will usually occur when compared to countries that this plate does not pass through.

The movement of this plate is estimated to move at a speed of 5-10 cm per year. Even so, the Pacific plate, Cocos plate, Antarctic plate, and the Nazca plate can move more than 10 cm per year, so their movement is faster when compared to other tectonic plates.

A geological map of the seafloor of the Pacific Ocean also reveals that geological sequences occurred over millions of years, forming the Ring of Fire at the largest ocean boundary. The Pacific plate can also show the chronology of the Pacific ocean floor by ladder step, with the oldest being substituted for the Asia Pacific Trench itself 145 million years ago.

Within a few years, the Pacific Plate along with the Pacific Basin began to shrink. This could occur at a time when North America and South America begin to move in a southerly westward direction, thereby expanding the Atlantic Ocean and compromising the Pacific Ocean.

The Pacific Plate as the Pacific Ring of Fire

The Pacific plate then forms most of the Pacific Ring of Fire. This pattern of plate tectonics is responsible for some of the most severe earthquakes and volcanoes in the world. This subduction along the outer boundary of the Pacific Ocean produces large arcs that can create earthquakes and volcanic activity. Therefore, this Pacific plate is also known as the Pacific Ring of Fire.

The Pacific Plate can be said to have a role as a “museum” of paleo-geology under the sea. That means, it contains the largest area with the oldest geological remains of the cast under the seafloor in the Asian oceanic trenches. There is evidence that the small Juan de Fuca, Nazka, and Cocos plates are remnants of an earlier plate, later called the Farallon.

Later, research records show that the Juan de Fuca, Nazka, and Cocos small plates are remnants of an earlier plate, also known as the Farallon. This is based on a geological map on the seabed of the Pacific Ocean which reveals that geological sequences took millions of years to finally form the Ring of Fire at the largest ocean boundary.

The Pacific plate will also show the chronology of the Pacific ocean floor, with the oldest then referring to the Asia Pacific Trench that existed from 145 million years ago. It also formed when the continents of North America as well as South America moved westward, expanding the Atlantic Ocean at the expense of the Pacific itself.

Pacific Plate Boundary

The Pacific Plate itself has stretched, starting from the west coast of North America all the way to Alaska. Then, on the west side, the Pacific plate stretches long enough to the east coast. Therefore, this Pacific plate also passes through the Japanese islands and also Indonesia.

The Pacific Plate itself is at a divergent boundary with the Explorer Plates, Juan de Fuca and Gorda which then successively form the Explorer Ridge, Juan de Fuca and Gorda, to the north on the east side.

Then, towards the middle on the east side, there is a transition boundary with the North American plate. The boundary runs along the San Andreas Fault which is directly adjacent to the cocos plate.

Then to the south there is also a divergent boundary with the Nazca plate. From this boundary produces an East Pacific Rise. In addition, in this southern part there is also a divergent boundary with the Antarctic plate which forms the Antarctic Pacific Ridge.

Continuing to the west edge there is a convergent boundary that is subducting at the bottom of the Eurasian plate. Then, to the north there is the Philippine plate which is in the middle and forms the Mariana Trench. Then, in the south, this Pacific plate has a convergent boundary with the Indo-Australian plate, which then subducts beneath it to northern New Zealand.

The Alpine Fault is a sign of the transitional boundary between the two plates. In addition, in the north there is a convergent boundary that subducts under the North American Plate which then forms the Aleutian Trench and the nearby Aleutian Islands.

The Driving Force of Plate Movement

The movement of tectonic plates can occur due to the relative density of the oceanic lithosphere and the relatively weaker character of the asthenosphere. This release of heat from the mantle has been obtained and is the original source of energy that drives plate tectonics.

The view or opinion that is currently approved is that the excess density of the oceanic lithosphere makes it infiltrate under the subduction zone, resulting in the strongest source of plate movement. Even so, such a view is still debated.

Then, at the time of its formation or at the mid-oceanic ridge, the oceanic lithosphere initially has a lower density than the asthenosphere and its surroundings. However, the density binds over time. This can happen because of the cooling and thickening process.

The large density of the old lithosphere then relative to the asthenosphere below allows intrusion into the deep mantle at subduction zones, thus being the source of most of the power in plate movements. One of the weaknesses of the asthenosphere is that it allows the plates to move easily toward the subduction zone.

Although subduction is believed to be the strongest driving force for plate movements, there are still other driving forces which are later proven by the existence of plates such as the North American plate, as well as the Eurasian plate which then moves but does not experience subduction anywhere.

This driving source itself is still a topic of intensive research and discussion among earth science scientists. Two- and three-dimensional imaging of the Earth’s interior (seismic tomography) showing a more heterogeneous density distribution laterally throughout the mantle.

These variations in density can themselves be material (from rock chemistry), mineral (from variations in mineral structure), or thermal (through thermal expansion and contraction from heat energy). The manifestation of this laterally heterogeneous density is mantle convection of buoyancy forces.

About how this mantle convection is very directly related and not related to planetary movements, so it is still a field that is being studied and discussed in geodynamics. One way or another, this energy must then be transferred to the lithosphere for the tectonic plates to move. There are two main types of forces that affect planetary motion, namely friction and gravity.

Every plate movement in the world, especially in Indonesia, will usually have an impact on the area around the plate. Although it is not known exactly why plates can move, it never hurts to always be alert to natural disasters that will occur when there is plate movement.

Owner is –  If Sinaumed’s is an entrepreneur, then Sinaumed’s needs to understand important terms related to business. One of the most important things to know in the business world is the term ‘Owner’, which refers to a person who has the right to carry out business activities. Apart from owner, another term that is closely related is founder. Even though these two terms seem the same, however, the owner and founder are different.

So that Sinaumed’s as a business actor is not wrong in mentioning the role of Sinaumed’s in the business world, Sinaumed’s needs to know what an owner is and its duties and differences from the founder. By knowing the meaning of owner, Sinaumed’s can identify the role appropriately.

Definition of Owner

Owner is an English word from the word own which means own or owner. Then, the term owner is widely used in the business world as a form of representation of people who own projects or finance and ensure business flows run smoothly. The word owner is also widely used by Indonesian people in everyday conversation. The word owner is usually used to refer to someone who owns a business.

However, the notion of owner can be seen from various angles. In Indonesian, owner means owner. However, in the business world, a person can be called an owner if he is the owner of the business. Therefore, the owner is also often referred to as the big boss whose job is to ensure that the business runs smoothly.

In general, the word owner is more focused on being used for company owners or people who invest in companies. Owners can also be individuals or groups.

In essence, the owner is someone who runs or invests in the company.

Owner can also be defined as someone who owns most or all of the shares of a company. An owner has the right to all profits obtained by the company, and also has responsibility for losses experienced by the company. In addition, the owner is also often known as the main shareholder ( shareholder ) in a company.

Duties and Responsibilities of the Owner

As the main shareholder, the owner is obliged to establish and manage the company in accordance with its vision and mission. He is also responsible for all of the company’s assets, both financial and other assets. The owner also has the right to determine the direction of company policy, as well as make all important decisions that will be taken by the company.

An owner is someone who owns a company or business. He is responsible for everything that happens in his company or business, be it success or failure. The responsibility of an owner is not only limited to financial aspects, but also includes legal, management and business strategy aspects.

To be clearer, see an explanation of the duties and responsibilities of an owner in running a business or company.

1. Leading the Company 

An owner has a duty to be a leader and is required to be able to ensure that his industry or business can run smoothly. The responsibility of an owner is certainly not easy.

There are many owners who then hand over their authority to directors and managers as the holder of the highest position after himself. Apart from being in charge of ensuring the business runs smoothly, owners are also required to actively coordinate with employees.

2. Make Company Rules

The authority of an owner is to make rules and policies that apply in the company and later, these policies must be obeyed by every employee or employee.

The process of making policies and regulations cannot be done haphazardly by an owner, even though he has that authority. Regulations and policies must be adapted to the conditions and risks that may occur in a company or business.

An owner has the right to fire employees who do not comply with the rules or give a warning in the form of an SP or a Warning Letter as a form of reprimand.

Everything is done so that the business run by the company can run smoothly and the performance of employees can be maximized.

3. Have Responsibility for Company Losses

Loss or profit in the business world has become a common thing, in this case the loss is of course the responsibility of an owner. Therefore, the owner is required to find a solution so that not all aspects of the company receive a negative impact from the company’s losses, especially for employees.

When experiencing a loss, business owners or owners will generally ask for help from other companies. The owner is required to be willing to intervene to negotiate the losses suffered by the company. That way, similar incidents will not be repeated.

4. Develop a Business Strategy

Marketing strategy development must be continuously updated, so that the company can achieve maximum results in running its business. The development of this business strategy is the responsibility of an owner so that he can fulfill the company’s vision and mission. Managing markets and finances is the most important thing in the steps of preparing a business plan.

5. Provide Cost or Budget for the Company

From the understanding of the owner, it can be seen that the owner is not only a business or company owner, but also someone who invests in certain companies.

Therefore, the job of an owner is to provide a budget for the company. The owner must be able to provide initial capital so that a company can stand up and continue to ensure that there is a budget used for the company’s operations.

The budget for the company can be from personal funds or loans. An owner is not allowed to miss this task and cannot be represented by someone else.

6. Conduct Evaluation

While supervising the running of the company, the owner must be sensitive if he finds something wrong with his business. Then, from the problem he found, an owner is required to think quickly to quickly find a solution. The solution taken should also not be based on mere emotion, but must be based on careful consideration by considering several factors.

7. Issuing Decisions 

The predicate of the owner is quite a heavy predicate, because an owner holds important responsibilities and duties for the smooth running of the business and the fate of the company’s employees.

One of the most important duties and responsibilities of an owner is making decisions. It is important for an owner to be present at every meeting, be it an evaluation meeting or an annual meeting.

All decisions from the owner can be decisive, whether the business run by the company can run well or vice versa.

Owner Function in a Company

In a company, the owner is someone who holds shares of more than 50% of all outstanding shares. In addition, he is also often referred to as the owner of the company or the main commissioner. The owner has responsibility for company policy and has full authority in managing the company.

Sometimes a question arises “why is an owner needed in a company?” Questions like this usually arise when discussing management buyout (MBO).

MBO is a process in which a group of senior executives and management gain control of a company by purchasing its shares from the original owners. This is done so that they are no longer influenced by the policies of the original owners and are able to manage the company according to its vision and mission.

In addition, the owner is also needed because it has several main functions in order to be able to run the company’s business, manage employees or their subordinates and ensure that sales are increasing. Here are some of the main functions of an owner in a company or business.

1. Providing Funds

The main function of an owner is to provide funds or money for the continuation of buying and selling carried out by the company. Starting from production costs to promotion must be in accordance with the financial plan of the company or business.

2. Carry out administrative activities

The second function of a company owner is to carry out administrative activities. Therefore, an owner must be capable and proficient in all administrative activities, for example such as compiling reports on the entry or exit of goods, dealing with permits, keeping financial records and so on.

Administrative activities must be carried out routinely, so that the progress of the company’s business is not hampered. In general, the affairs of this administrative activity will relate directly to government offices, such as customs and taxes.

3. Giving Tasks to Employees

Another function of an owner is to give tasks or jobs to employees and employees. These tasks include promotion, marketing, shipping, packaging and so on.

Difference between Owner and Founder

When talking about a company, the terms ‘owner’ and ‘founder’ are often read with the same words. In fact, if you look closely, these two terms have different meanings.

The term ‘owner’ is usually used to communicate that someone owns shares or part of a company. Meanwhile, the term ‘founder’ is used to refer to people who have created a company or business.

In some cases, the terms ‘owner’ and ‘founder’ may be used together to refer to a person who has founded a company. However, there are also several examples of using these two terms simultaneously and interpreting the terms owner and founder as the same term.

However, when translated, the meaning of owner and founder can be in the form of the following.

The owner is someone who is above the organizational structure and has full control over all aspects of the company’s operations. The owner is usually the founder or owner of the company, who has the authority to make all strategic decisions.

However, in some cases, owner and founder can be two different positions. Founder is someone who first founded a company and creates value for the company. Founders usually have a long-term vision for the company and will continue to have an active role in developing it.

While the owner is someone who officially has full control over a company, either through share ownership or a certain position. The owner is often not the founder of the company, but he or she may be the third or fourth generation of a family business.

A founder can be defined as someone who creates a company or organization. While the owner is someone who owns the company or organization. The founder usually participates in managing the company, while the owner may not be directly involved in the company’s operations. The owner can be a group or business entity, and not just one person.

The difference between owner and founder is not only seen from their understanding, but can also be seen from the ownership status of the company and the tasks they have. Here’s an explanation.

1. Business Ownership Status

The status of an owner can fluctuate from time to time based on the largest share ownership and the most profit sharing.

As long as an owner does not relinquish his share ownership, he can continue to be an owner or carry that title. This is of course different from the title of founder, because regardless of the status of business ownership, the role of a founder cannot be replaced.

This is because the party who first set up the business will continue to be referred to as the founder of the business or company, even when that party decides to sell the company or share ownership they own.

In fact, it is not uncommon for someone to be called the founder even though the business he is running is no longer operational or may have gone bankrupt.

2. Tasks 

When viewed from their duties, there are some fundamental differences between an owner and a founder. As the first party to set up a company, the founder’s job is to compile a SABH or also known as a Legal Entity Administration System to ensure the legality of the business operations they have.

An owner is not required to have multiple roles, because he could have joined after the SABH was drafted. The owner will have more roles in business operations.

In general, the job of an owner is to ensure a business operation has a good enough performance, so that the business can generate profits and not suffer losses.

This also causes more owners to be in strategic positions in top managerial positions. An owner can determine the direction of developing his business and determine the steps that need to be taken to achieve the goals of this development.

Meanwhile, the founder, if he does not concurrently act as an owner, will not take too much of a role in business operational matters. In practice, sometimes the owner is also allowed to decide that he does not want to be involved much in business operations and hand over his function to run the business to other parties.

When concluded, the basic difference between a founder and an owner can be seen from their understanding. A founder is generally someone who has an idea and sparks an initial idea or idea about the business he will run.

A founder can be called an owner, because all profits will go to the founder. However, over time, the status of the owner on a founder can be lost, if the founder relinquishes the ownership shares of the company he owns.

Meanwhile, an owner is an individual, group or organization that invests in shares, provides capital and invests in a business. In simple terms, owners are parties who own a business.

That’s the explanation about the owner is a business owner. For Sinaumed’s who want to become an entrepreneur and become an owner, Sinaumed’s can learn about business by reading books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia.com always provides various kinds of quality and original books for Sinaumed’s! Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Khansa

Reference:

• https://katadata.co.id/redaksi/ekonopedia/62a7f2e5e9a8b/definition-owner-si-bos-large-enterprise-dan-bedanya-dengan-founder
• https://www.linovhr.com/owner-dan-founder/#/differences
• https://habibhidayat.com/owner- is-owner-of-company-beda-dengan-ceo#Tagas_dan_Peran_Penting_Owner

Ovoviviparous Animals – There are three types of reproduction in the animal kingdom, namely the oviparous (egg-laying), viviparous (dwelling) and ovoviviparous (egg-laying) ways. The three ways of reproduction also have different characteristics. The following is an explanation of ovoviviparous animal reproduction.

Ovoviviparous definition

Ovovivipar is a way of animal reproduction by multiplying eggs in the mother’s body, but the food reserves obtained by the embryo come from inside the egg, not from the mother’s body. Ovoviviparous animals do not have a placenta to provide food, oxygen and exchange of wastes.

This animal also does not have an umbilical cord to connect the embryo with its mother. To make it clearer, ovoviviparous animals are types of animals that reproduce by oviparous (laying eggs) and viviparous (giving birth). Ovoviviparous animals are also often referred to as animals that lay eggs because they use both reproductive systems. There are 2 types of ovoviviparous animals based on their habitat, namely ovoviviparous animals living in water and ovoviviparous animals living on land.

The following are the characteristics of ovoviviparous animals, namely:

1. Generative or sexual reproduction
2. Fertilization forms eggs
3. Store food reserves on eggs
4. The embryo grows in the egg perfectly
5. Brio’s growth is relatively fast
6. Parent body shape with the same child
7. Has no ears.
8. Breed in a generative way
9. Reproduction through internal fertilization
10. Can produce eggs that hatch inside the body of the female parent
11. The embryo does not have an umbilical cord that can connect it to the mother
12. The embryo does not have a placenta which provides a supply of food or oxygen
13. The embryo obtains nutrition or food from the yolk
14. After the eggs hatch, the ovoviviparous chicks remain inside the mother’s body
15. Ovoviviparous animals will give birth to their young just like viviparous animals
16. The ovoviviparous pups that are born will be the same as their parents

Definition of Oviparous Animals –  Oviparous Animals – Breeding is a new regeneration that replaces the old generation. This means that every living thing experiences reproduction, which is not only for humans, but for all living things, including plants and animals. If humans reproduce using only one way, namely giving birth, but in animals there are three types of reproduction, namely viviparous (giving birth), oviparous (laying eggs) and ovoviviparous (laying eggs and giving birth to children). The word ovipar itself comes from the word “ovum” which means laying eggs.

Oviparous is a type of reproduction that causes the eggs that are released to develop and also hatch outside the mother’s body. In addition, there are two types of fertilization that occurs in oviparous animals, namely internal fertilization and external fertilization. Internal fertilization will occur in the body of the female parent, as is the process experienced by aves animals, for example birds and insects, for example insects. External fertilization which will occur outside the female parent’s body, such as the process experienced by frogs and fish.

Groups of animals that reproduce in oviparous are animals whose sexual reproduction is characterized by the female and male releasing their germ cells outside the body and fertilization and occurring outside the animal’s body. The reproductive system also does not occur with copulation and the eggs released outside the body are very permeable.

As explained earlier that oviparous animals are a group of animals that reproduce by laying eggs. Inside the egg there is an embryo that obtains food reserves from within the egg. Animals with oviparous breeding generally have characteristics with their eggs being incubated until they hatch.

Characteristics of Oviparous Animals

Animals with oviparous reproduction certainly have their own characteristics that are different from animals with other breeding. The following are the characteristics of oviparous animals, namely:

1. Does not have ear lobes
2. Does not have mammary glands
3. Not breastfeeding her child
4. Incubate the eggs

Benefits of Oviparous Breeding

Oviparous breeding provides several benefits for both the embryo and the parent animal. Here are some of the benefits that can be obtained in oviparous animals, namely:

1. There are embryos that are inside the shell and are more protected from the environment, for example from hot weather or cold weather.
2. The yellow eggs inside the shell can be used as food for the embryo.
3. The amnion inside the shell can be used as a source of protein and water.
4. Embryos can be protected from shocks and rocks.
5. The shell can also protect the embryo from predators because eggs are usually laid in the nest.
6. The shell can be used as a protector.
7. If the eggs are not cared for, they can be reproduced by humans with a variety of breeding methods.

Examples of Oviparous Animals

Oviparous animals that reproduce by laying eggs are also divided into several groups. The following are examples of types of oviparous animals and their explanations:

1. Poultry Group

The poultry group is an animal that is included in animals that reproduce by laying eggs. Then the mother will incubate the eggs for some time. After that, the eggs will hatch and become small animals.

Here are some examples of oviparous animals from the poultry group, namely:

a. Ayam

Chickens are birds that can be cared for by humans and can also be used for life needs in their maintenance. Chickens basically show morphological differences in both sexes. Roosters or roosters are more attractive, larger in size, have long spurs, have a bigger comb, and have long, dangling tail feathers.

Meanwhile, hens or baboons are relatively smaller in size, with short or barely visible bristles, small combs, and short tail feathers. Regarding sex, this is regulated by the hormonal system. If there is a disturbance in the physiological function of the body, the hen can change sex to become a rooster, this is because adult chickens still have ovotestis which are dormant and can be active at any time.

b. Baby

Ducks have a curved and wide body, have a relatively long neck, though not as long as a swan. Duck body shape varies and is generally rounded. The beak is wide and contains lamellae which are used as food filters.

In fishing species, the beak is longer and stronger. The scaled legs are strong and well developed, and generally set far back on the body, which is common in aquatic birds. Its wings are very strong and its lifespan is short. Duck flight requires flapping so it requires strong wing muscles.

Male ducks of northern hemisphere species sometimes have attractive plumage colors. Species from the Southern Hemisphere show no sexual dimorphism except for the Paradise Shelduck in New Zealand which is brighter than the males. The color of young ducks, whether male or female, is generally more like an adult female duck.

Duck food varies, such as grass, plants, water, fish, insects, small amphibians, worms and small mollusks. Diving ducks and sea ducks find food in the depths of the water. To make it easier for ducks to dive, both types have a greater mass making it more difficult for them to fly.

c. Goose

Geese also reproduce by oviparous processes and the same as occurs in chicken eggs. Goose eggs have a larger size than other poultry animals with an incubation process of up to twenty days.

Swans feed on land as well as in water. Geese are almost always herbivorous, although small aquatic animals may fall prey to geese. In water, swans obtain food by filtering the water and their diet also consists of the roots, stems and leaves of aquatic plants and aquatic plants.

d. Bird

Birds are also one of the animals that lay eggs. When birds lay their eggs, after that the mother bird will incubate the eggs for approximately twenty one days until their children hatch.

If Sinaumed’s is interested in cultivating chicken-type poultry, Sinaumed’s can read the book as a reference and get the book which is available at www.sinaumedia.com .

2. Fish Group

In general, groups of fish species breed by laying eggs or oviparous. Beginning with the mother who issued a very large number of eggs. Then the fish will release the eggs after being fertilized by sperm and the eggs will hatch into fish children.

In breeding, these fish will grow from fry or embryos. Then it becomes a juvenile fish and becomes an adult fish. Fish are usually bred by humans for cultivation purposes. However, there are also those that breed naturally.

Here are some examples of oviparous animals from the fish group, namely:

a. Goldfish

Goldfish or carp ( Cyprinus Carpio) is a freshwater fish that has important economic value and its distribution is everywhere in Indonesia.

The goldfish life cycle begins with development in the gonads or ovaries in fish which produce eggs and testicles in male fish which produce sperm. The transfer of goldfish can occur all year round and does not depend on the season. However, in their natural habitat, goldfish often spawn at the beginning of the rainy season, stimulated by the smell of stagnant dry soil.

Naturally, spawning occurs from midnight to late dawn. Prior to spawning, the mother carp actively looks for a lush place, such as aquatic plants or grass that covers the surface of the water. It is this substrate that will later be used as a place for attaching eggs as well as helping stimulation when spawning occurs.

The nature of goldfish eggs is attached to the substrate. 2 to 3 days later the eggs will hatch and grow into larvae. Goldfish larvae have relatively large yolk sacs as food reserves for the larvae and will run out within 2-4 days. Goldfish larvae are attached and move vertically.

The larvae turn into a white coat in 4-5 days. After 2-3 weeks, the whiteflies grow into fry measuring 1-3 cm and weighing 0.1-0.5 grams. Between 2-3 weeks later the seeds grow into white or seeds that are ready to be seeded which have a size of 3-5 cm and weigh 0.5-2.5 grams. The whites will continue to grow, and after three months they will turn into logs which weigh about 100 grams per head.

If Sinaumed’s is interested in goldfish and wants to make it into a business, Sinaumed’s can read books available at www.sinaumedia.com .

b. Siamese fighting fish

Betta fish or betta fish are in great demand for collection and are also used to decorate the house. Betta fish are classified as egg-laying or oviparous animals.

The shape of the eggs that betta fish have resembles the foam that can be found on plants in water and on the sides of the aquarium. Betta fish eggs only need three days to hatch.

If Sinaumed’s is interested in any type of fish farming, Sinaumed’s can read books available at www.sinaumedia.com .

3. Reptile group

The method of reproduction of reptile groups begins with the process of mating between females and males. Then the female reptile lays eggs. After a few days, the eggs will hatch into tiny reptile pups. After increasing time, the reptile child will turn into an adult reptile. Animals that lay eggs from the reptile group live in water and also live on land.

Here are some examples of oviparous animals from the reptile group, namely:

a. Crocodile

Crocodiles are animals that reproduce by laying eggs or oviparous. Crocodiles will dig a hole in the mound of soil to lay their eggs. Usually, a female alligator will protect the nest as well as her children.

Depending on the species, crocodiles can lay seven to ninety-five eggs in one clutch at a time. Crocodile eggs also take about eighty days until the time for the eggs to hatch arrives.

b. Lizard

Lizards are animals that we often encounter on the roofs of Sinaumed’s’ houses, which are also oviparous animals. Lizards hide eggs in hidden places, such as behind cupboards and other places that can avoid being targeted by predators.

There are also several types of lizards that also reproduce in an ovoviviparous way. But the lizard that we often encounter at home is a type of oviparous animal that reproduces by laying eggs.

c.

Turtle species reproduce by laying eggs without exception. Turtles have a certain mating season and the peak occurs from December to June. Female turtles store sperm for years after mating. After that, the sperm fertilizes the egg.

Then the turtles will lay the most eggs from May to July. Once laid eggs, turtles will issue 1 to 26 eggs. The mother will not incubate the eggs. The mother will dig a nest with a depth of about 10 cm which is useful for keeping the eggs safe and warm.

After laying their eggs, turtles will cover their eggs with a mixture of soil, urine and faeces. The mixture will harden and become a protective coating for the turtle. The sex of the embryo will be affected by the ambient temperature around the egg. If the temperature around the egg is more than 29.5°C, then the embryo will become a female.

If the temperature is below 28°C, then the embryo will be a male turtle. And the eggs will hatch after 90 to 270 days. After hatching, the baby turtles will remain in the nest to feed on the eggs for a month.

d. Ular

Sexual maturity in snakes varies and depends on size, health and also the species. But snakes generally reach sexual maturity around two to three years of age. Species also sometimes take longer to reach sexual maturity due to nutritional deficiencies.

Signs of sexual maturity in male snakes are the appearance of scales near the anal area while sexual maturity in female snakes is indicated by the cloacal capsule visible from the ventral surface.

Usually, female snakes are ready to lay their eggs after two weeks to a month of mating. Most snake species use natural holes to lay their eggs. They also prefer to lay their eggs in moist soil. Until the time for hatching arrives, snake eggs will incubate from the heat of the atmosphere or from the heat of the mother’s body.

Sinaumed’s interested in raising turtles and other reptiles? Sinaumed’s can read books which of course are available at www.sinaumedia.com .

4. Amphibious Group

Amphibians that reproduce by means of external or internal fertilization. Amphibian animals will attract their partners in various ways. For example by using a loud voice. But there are also those who use the sense of smell to find a partner.

Examples of amphibian groups that include oviparous animals are frogs and toads. The following is a further explanation of examples of oviparous animals in the amphibian group, namely:

a. Frog

Frogs are a type of amphibian that reproduce by laying eggs but unlike oviparous animals in general, the male frog will fertilize the eggs that the female has released in the water.

Eggs that have been fertilized by male frogs will then develop and hatch in the water and become tadpoles or tadpoles. The tadpole will go through a metamorphosis stage where the lungs and legs begin to appear which then grow into adult frogs.

b. Frog

The female frog will release an egg that has been fertilized by a male sperm cell through the cloaca. Adult frogs can produce hundreds of eggs at a time.

The female egg cell that is successfully fertilized will form a zygote, which will then grow into an embryo. The frog embryo gets its food reserves from the egg. Furthermore, frog eggs that have hatched will produce new individuals, namely tadpoles which will become tadpoles. Tadpoles live underwater and breathe using gills.

These tadpoles will develop and metamorphose until the tail disappears, which then becomes tadpoles with two legs to four legs. The four-legged tadpoles will become young frogs, the young frogs will grow into adult frogs. Adult frogs will live more on land, because adult frogs have breathed with lungs and skin. Adult frogs only occasionally go into the water to find females for the purpose of mating and reproducing.

 

The function of the Oviduk – Sinaumed’s must have known clearly that every human living on this earth, both men and women, has their own reproductive system. Through this reproductive system is one of the main ways to maintain offspring as well as civilization in the world, especially for women. Well, in the female reproductive system there are 2 parts, namely the inside which cannot be seen directly and the outside which can be seen with the naked eye. On the inside there is an organ called the oviduct, aka the fallopian tube, which has many functions for female reproduction.

So, what are the functions of the oviduct for the reproductive process? How does the oviduct, aka the fallopian tube, work? Is the oviduct also susceptible to disorders that can cause difficulty getting pregnant? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

What are the functions of the oviduct in the female reproductive system?

Before discussing the functions of the oviduct in the female reproductive system, it would be better if Sinaumed’s first understood what an oviduct is.

The oviduct or what can also be referred to as the fallopian tube is basically a canal that connects the ovaries (ovaries) and the uterus, with a length of 10-13 cm and a diameter of about 1 cm. Since this oviduct is an internal reproductive organ, of course it cannot be seen with the naked eye. However, it is located in the lower abdomen, with the tip located near the ovary.

As with other reproductive organs, the oviduct, aka the fallopian tube, also consists of several layers. The outermost layer is a membrane called the serosa . Meanwhile, the inner layer is a layer of muscle called pyosalpinx .

The main function of the oviduct is of course as a place for the passage of eggs from the ovaries to the uterus, especially when ovulation occurs. Another function of the oviduct related to the reproductive process is as a meeting place for the egg and sperm, especially during fertilization.

So, if the oviduct, aka the fallopian tube, is blocked, then of course the egg’s journey to the uterus will be hampered. Later, when the egg and sperm meet in this oviduct, the channel will attach to the lining of the uterus (endometrium). The existence of the oviduct in the female reproductive system is certainly very important, especially for pregnant. The following are the functions of the oviduct in the female reproductive system, namely:

1. As a connecting line between the ovum and the uterus

The function of the first oviduct is to act as a connecting link between a woman’s egg, aka ovum, and the uterus (uterus). Later, the ovum will travel to the uterus which is assisted by cilia. These cilia are shaped like fine hairs.

2. As a Temporary Embryo Splitting Place

The function of the second oviduct is as a place for division and growth of the embryo temporarily. After that, then the embryo attached to the endometrium. For Sinaumed’s who forgets what an embryo is, this embryo is basically the beginning of the formation of a baby in the process of pregnancy.

3. As the Occurrence of Ovum Fertilization

The third function of the oviduct is as a place for fertilization of the egg, aka ovum. The ovum that has been fertilized by these sperm cells will later attach to the uterine wall and as it develops becomes a pregnancy.

How Does Oviduct Work?

Primarily, the oviduct, aka the fallopian tube, must work optimally, especially when it is in the process of reproduction between a woman and a man. Reporting from yoona.id , the way the oviduct works will be related to the function of the oviduct that women should feel, especially for the purpose of pregnancy.

The first way it works is by transporting the egg (ovum) from the ovary to the uterus (uterus). In order for fertilization of the egg to occur, sperm cells from the male must first go to the oviduct. After the egg and sperm cells meet in this oviduct, then the egg will be fertilized by the sperm cell.

If this is the case, there will be contractions in the oviduct. The egg will then continue its journey to the uterus (uterus). In essence, the way the oviduct works is related to the function of the oviduct as the main road that the egg must pass before it goes to the uterus (uterus).

Vulnerable Disorders Occur in the Oviduct

Even though the oviduct is an invisible internal reproductive organ, it can actually experience interference. This disorder is caused by a blocked oviduct which prevents sperm cells from meeting the egg in the uterus, so that fertilization cannot occur. This condition greatly affects fertility disorders, aka infertility, you know…

Unfortunately, a blocked oviduct rarely causes obvious symptoms, so women often don’t know whether their oviduct is “healthy” or not. However, according to alodokter.com , there are several conditions in which women feel pain in the lower abdomen and abnormal vaginal discharge as a result of a blocked oviduct. Well, it turns out that this blockage can cause several health problems related to this oviduct.

Please note , Sinaumed’s , that every woman generally has 2 oviducts, so blockages can occur in both or even just one of the oviducts. All over the world, there are women who are born with only one oviduct. However, if one oviduct is in good health and the menstrual cycle is normal, one can still get pregnant and have children.

The following are disorders or health problems caused by blockage of the oviduct.

1. Ectopic Pregnancy

Ectopic pregnancy is a condition in which pregnancy occurs outside the womb. This means that the embryo, aka the prospective baby, is outside the main cavity of the uterus. This happens because the egg is too late to be transported to the uterus. Yep, this condition can occur, especially when the fertilized embryo does not even go down to the uterus, but still survives in this oviduct.

This ectopic pregnancy, if it is still maintained, actually endangers health. If this is not treated immediately by professional medical personnel, it can cause abnormal uterine bleeding to death.

2. Fallopian Tube Cancer

In fact, some types of cancer that are diagnosed as ovarian cancer originate in this oviduct. There is also a type of cancer called high-grade serous ovarian cancer which also starts from a blocked oviduct.

3. Kista Paratubal

These cysts are benign and usually can still heal even without treatment. Cysts filled with fluid form near the ovaries and oviducts.

4. Endometriosis

Endometriosis is a condition in which the endometrium, aka the tissue that lines the uterine wall, instead grows outside the uterine wall. Strong suspicion, the cause of this is a disturbance of blood flow during menstruation. The main symptoms are intense pain or cramps in the lower abdomen or pelvis.

Treatment can be done by taking pain relievers to hormone therapy to inhibit tissue growth. Sufficient exercise and maintaining an ideal body weight are also early steps that can be taken to prevent endometriosis.

5. Tubal torsion

This condition in the form of twisting of the oviduct can of course interfere with the function of the oviduct as it should. This causes the blood supply to the oviducts and ovaries to become depleted. If not treated immediately, it can affect fertility.

6. Salpingitis

Salpingitis is an inflammation that causes the oviduct to thicken. The symptoms are almost similar to pelvic inflammatory disease in the form of pain in the lower abdomen, abnormal uterine bleeding, and others. There are 2 types of salpingitis that women are susceptible to, namely Salpingitis Isthmica Nodosa and Non-Nodular Salpingitis.

For the type of Salpingitis Isthmica Nodosa, it tends to form nodules which makes it difficult for the egg to pass through the oviduct. Meanwhile, for the type of Non-Nodular Salpingitis, it can occur due to infection. Both of these types still need to be treated immediately because they can carry the risk of ectopic pregnancy and infertility.

7. Infertility

In short, interfertility is a condition in which pregnancy does not occur even though you have had regular sexual intercourse within a year. This can occur due to interference with the ovulation process. Considering that ovulation is the process of releasing an egg from the ovary, if this process is disrupted it can cause sperm cells to be unable to fertilize eggs.

In connection with this infertility , it’s not entirely the wife’s fault , but the husband’s side can also be a contributing factor as well. Especially for married couples whose wife is less than 35 years old, it is better to immediately see a gynecologist if after a year of marriage they have not had a child.

Factors that cause infertility are irregular menstrual cycles, PCOS syndrome, smoking and drinking habits, stress, strict diets, obesity, and others.

8. Hidrosalping

This disorder occurs when one or both of the oviducts become swollen and filled with thick fluid. This of course will cause infection as well as blockage of the oviduct itself. This hydrosalpinx condition can also cause infertility in women , you know because of the swelling of the oviduct earlier.

Understanding the Female Reproductive Organ System

As with other organ systems, in the female reproductive organ system there are also separate parts, which are generally located on the inside and outside. The inside of this can not be seen directly, while the outside of course can be seen directly. So, here is a description of the parts contained in the female reproductive system, aka Miss V!

The outside part

1. Mons Pubis

Namely the outermost part of the female reproductive system. The shape is similar to the triangle that protects the pubic bone (pubic symphysis). In this section, there is fatty tissue, skin tissue, connective tissue, sweat glands, and fine hair roots.

2. Labia Majora

Namely folds that almost resemble the shape of the lips, so they are often also called pubic lips. Based on its location, this part of the labia majora has 2 types, namely those on the outer surface and the inner surface.

On the outer surface of the labia majora there will be a layer of horny epithelial cells and hair roots. Meanwhile, those that are located on the inner surface will appear slippery because they have fatty tissue and do not have hair follicles or sweat glands.

3. Labia minora

In short, the labia minora are small lips that are located on the genitals, to be precise next to the labia majora and before Miss V. The main thing that distinguishes the labia minora from the labia majora is that there are no fine hair roots and instead have lots of blood vessels.

If you want to read an explanation of what  the labia minora are in detail, you can click here .

4. Klirotis

Namely a sexual organ that is inside Miss V. It has a structure that is almost the same as the penis in men, even both are in the same position. The most striking difference is that the clirot grows inward, while the male penis grows outward.

5. Hymen

Namely a thin membrane that covers the hole in Miss V and is about 1-2 cm from Miss V’s lips. Just a little trivia , the hymen that every woman has is different, right, it will even grow along with the development of Miss V in women . Although all women are generally born with a hymen, it turns out that some are not.

6. Manufacturing

Namely the pubic cavity which is located in the labia minora. This organ becomes the estuary of the urethra (urinary tract) and the vaginal opening.

The inside part

1. Miss V

Namely the sexual organs that are owned by women with a shape like a tube. Its function is to have sex as well as the birth canal of the baby.

2. Uterus or Womb

Being the most important organ for female reproduction. This uterus is connected to the cervix (cervical) which is also connected to Miss V and the fallopian tubes. Well, during pregnancy, later the baby’s development process will occur in this womb.

3. Fallopian tubes or oviducts

Namely the channel that connects the ovaries (egg cells) to the uterus. This channel is also the place where fertilization occurs between sperm and ovum. Not only that, the fallopian tubes are also a place for temporary embryo growth or division, before finally attaching to the lining of the uterus.

4. Ovaries

Namely the ovaries which have a function in the form of sex cell-producing organs for women. This organ has 2 pieces which are located on the right side and left side of the uterus with an oval round shape.

•  

Speech Framework – For many people to do standing up and speaking in front of a large number of people is very intimidating. In normal situations, we can casually chat with one, two, even chat with ten more people is fine. But the story is different, if we are the ones who have to speak in front of them.

It’s not really a matter of speech, because everyone can talk pretty well with friends or strangers they’ve just met. However, the problem is that many people feel nervous when they are the center of attention, especially if the people watching us are strangers.

Guaranteed, words that usually flow smoothly, suddenly will be messy. After all, let’s not talk in front of new people, we are even still often nervous when we have to speak in front of people we know well.

The same thing applies when we have to give a speech. For those who are used to public speaking, speeches are easy to do. All that’s left is to prepare the script, move forward, present the script that we have prepared, say thank you, done.

However, for those who are not familiar, the business of this speech can be very complicated. Again, it’s not about conveying the material, but being the center of attention.

So, if you are not a fluent speech person, you really have to read the following tips!

 

 

Tips for Avoiding Nervousness During a Speech in Front of Many People

Many people can be good listeners, but very few can be good speakers, especially when it has to be done in front of dozens of pairs of eyes. Nervousness, coupled with mind overload, makes this trivial task so difficult to do. So, for those of you who are preparing for a public speech and want your speech to run smoothly, let’s try the tips below!

1. Prepare a Speech Script

When deciding to give a speech, it means we have to convey something to the crowd. To formulate the points we want to convey, we must first make a speech text. Actually, the matter of making this manuscript depends on each individual.

Great people belonging to this nation, such as the first President of the Republic of Indonesia, Ir. Soekarno was nicknamed the ‘Lion of the Podium’ because of his skill in moving the hearts of thousands of people with his speeches. President Soekarno did not need any script when giving a speech.

However, everything he said was clear and to the point. The same thing usually applies to those who are used to speaking in public. The more experience they have, the less often they need scripts for speeches.

However, not everyone is like that. For those of you who basically don’t like appearing in public or for the first time giving a speech, having a script is very important. This is because the script that has been made can make it easier for you to convey your points or intentions to your audience. More than that, having the script in front of you will also make you more focused and ready to speak.

To make it easier, you can first make a speech framework that contains the stages of giving a speech. By making a speech outline, it will be easier for you to draft your speech.

2. Practice Yourself Before Advance

Apart from preparing the script, you also need to practice before appearing in front of many people. Usually people practice in front of a mirror. Talking in front of our own reflection is believed to help increase our self-confidence. Once you feel good, you can try giving a speech in front of some of the people closest to you.

Ask family and close friends to pretend to be in the audience. However, talking in front of them won’t be too scary because you already know them very well.

After the speech is over, you can ask them to comment on your appearance. Is it good enough? What needs to be fixed, and which parts are good enough to use.

Practicing yourself before giving a speech in front of a crowd is very important. Because only then, you will feel more prepared and confident to speak.

3. Choose Appropriate Clothing

Humans are visual creatures, so when we walk to the front of the room, our appearance is the first thing others notice. For that, make sure you look neat when giving a speech.

If necessary, wear clothes such as a shirt with a suit, and shoes to make it look formal. A neat appearance will make you look more attractive. In addition, an attractive appearance will also make you appear more confident than before.

4. Come At Least An Hour Before

Considering that you hold an important part in an event, then you can’t come late. Instead, you must come before the event starts. Arriving earlier, will make you have more time to get ready.

You can see the situation where the event takes place, the layout of the stage and the portions, the audience that is present, and familiarize yourself with it all. Knowing how the situation and the audience that is present will make you much more prepared and less nervous.

After all, try to imagine how the audience and the people who give their trust will react if you arrive late? You are not only making them wait, more than that, they will also be disappointed.

5. Confident

Among all the tips, this one tip is arguably the most difficult. Building self-confidence is not easy, but that doesn’t mean you can’t do it.

First, stop thinking negatively, and try to build interaction with the audience. Before starting your speech, you can sweep your eyes across everyone, and try to smile. A smile is very important, and can help reduce the feeling of nervousness that is ready to attack.

You also have to realize that you have worked hard to be able to appear today, after all, what you have to say is not a bad thing either. If you get nervous, and your speech falls apart, your efforts to give a speech will be in vain.

6. Think Positive

One of the problems with many people is that they can’t control their thoughts. When doing difficult things, our minds will wander everywhere. Unfortunately, the mind is mostly filled with negative things that make us feel afraid. In fact, what we think does not necessarily turn into reality.

Well, you shouldn’t be trapped by bad thoughts that arise. Try to get out of bad thoughts and turn those fears into positive things that make you excited to do it.

Try to think of the good and fun things that will happen if you succeed in delivering your speech well. Whether the audience’s response was good, the sense of pride that arose, to everyone’s applause.

By keeping your mind positive, what you are going to do will run smoothly. Everything will not be as easy as turning the palm of the hand. However, at least it won’t be as difficult as we imagine. So put your mind at ease, okay?

7. Continue to Introspect and Improve Yourself

No human being can escape mistakes. Likewise when you give a speech in public, especially if the speech is your first speech. However, you are not used to doing it yet.

You also don’t know exactly how to deliver a good speech, and how the audience will react. So it’s only natural that in your first speech, you made a lot of small mistakes.

However, even though it’s normal to make a mistake, it doesn’t mean you can repeat the same mistake every time you get the chance to give a speech. To avoid the same mistakes when giving a speech, you must be diligent in introspection.

After getting off the podium, don’t immediately forget the script or the moment. Remember what you said earlier, including the parts that you thought were lacking. Practice again at home, and work on what’s wrong. That way, you won’t keep making the same mistakes over and over again.

How to Make a Speech Outline

After reading some of the tips above, preparing a speech script is the first thing you should do. Unfortunately, either because they are nervous or because they are not used to it, many people find it difficult to script their speech. As a result, the script that was made was not good, and the speech that was delivered was messy.

If you are one of those who have the same difficulty, you can start by making a speech outline. The speech framework itself consists of several important points in the speech, and here’s how to make a speech framework that you can make!

1. Opening Speech

In this first step, you need to create a speech opening. This speech framework is simply as self-introduction to the audience. Therefore, in the framework of this speech, it should be made with language that is not too heavy so that the audience wants to hear the contents of the speech.

Even though what you say is important, you can’t just convey the main points in your speech. In a speech, you have to open it with an opening.

The opening of the speech itself consists of several parts, namely opening greetings, words of praise and thanksgiving, expressing respect to the audience and people who are considered important or influential at the event, brief self-introductions if necessary, and finally a brief explanation of the topics to be discussed in the speech. .

2. Content Speech

After the opening, you can start creating the contents of the speech. The content of the speech itself consists of important points that you must convey. However, keep in mind, the content of the speech must not only be about the target or target audience, but also be in accordance with the topic of discussion that day.

Since the body of the speech is the most important part, you have to make it as good as possible. The content of a good speech does not mean it has to look complicated. Instead, the contents of the speech should be made concise with sentences that are pleasant to read and hear.

With appropriate sentences, the audience can easily understand the topic you are talking about and you will have no difficulty understanding the topic, remembering it, and saying it in front of many people.

3. Concluding Section

A good speech doesn’t always have to be long and bore the other person. A speech is considered good if the points we convey are well conveyed and understood by the audience.

So, after you have delivered all of the contents of the speech, you can immediately end the speech. The closing part of the speech itself contains a summary and conclusion of the topics you have conveyed, and your hopes as a speaker.

Don’t forget to apologize if there are parts of the speech that are not quite right, both the words and the way they are delivered. Also thank everyone for taking the time to attend the event, and listen to your speech carefully.

Finally, because your speech begins with a greeting, you must also end it with a greeting. The greeting itself can be in the form of a sentence “Assalamu’alaikum Warahmatullahi Wabarakatuh” or a greeting “Good morning, good afternoon, good afternoon or good night”.

The Purpose of Making a Speech Outline

Making a speech outline can be a pain, because we have to write several times until the text is finally ready. For people who are already experts in giving speeches, making speech outlines is obviously troublesome and unnecessary. This is because they know what to say.

However, what is considered a hassle by others, may actually be something that must be done by others. Even though it’s a hassle, the step of making a speech framework is very important for those who are not used to giving speeches in front of many people. In addition, making a speech framework also has several goals. Here are 5 goals for making a speech outline that you should know!

1. Making the Speech Manuscript Making Process Easier

Never mind giving speeches, writing speech scripts is also difficult for those who are not used to it. Nervousness plus other negative thoughts, often makes our minds unfocused, so that the script that is made becomes a mess.

With a messy script, your speech will not go well either. So that this disaster doesn’t happen, you have to make sure the script you are going to use later is good.

So, making a speech framework aims to make the speech text good enough. Either in terms of sentence structure, or the points to be conveyed are in accordance with the topic to be discussed.

2. So that Audiences Can Easily Understand Our Speeches

One of the main characteristics of a failed speech is that the listeners or audience do not understand what we convey in the speech. There are two reasons why this could happen. First, because your speech is too long to make the audience bored and eventually lose their focus.

It could also be because the content of the speech you are delivering is too complicated, so that people who listen to it are confused and don’t clearly understand the intent of your speech.

By making a speech framework, you will avoid these two things. As a result, the speech you deliver is not too complicated, and the listener or audience can understand it well.

3. Ensuring All Points Delivered

Sometimes nervousness makes our minds chaotic. No matter how often we practice, excessive nervousness will make the sentences we practice just disappear, and the points made will be forgotten. If that’s the case, we will definitely feel very sorry and disappointed with ourselves.

Considering that you can’t go ahead and give a speech twice on one occasion, you have to make sure that all the points in the speech have been conveyed.

By making a speech outline, you can formulate all the points in the text and make it the main guide when giving a speech. So, even if you’re a little nervous, at least you can still convey everything you want to convey.

 

Conclusion

The outline of the speech consists of three parts, namely the opening, the body, and the closing part. Each of these speech frameworks are related to one another, so they cannot be separated. Therefore, in making a speech, you should pay attention to the opening, content, and closing parts so that the points of the speech do not go astray and the audience understands each point or intent of the contents of the speech.

Giving a speech is not an easy matter for those who are not used to it. However, by framing your speech, this matter will be much easier for you. Coupled with increasing experience, it will make anyone who was not used to it become fluent and able to deliver speeches well.

For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about giving speeches, you can really visit www.sinaumedia.com. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, we always try to provide the best and newest information for you and #MoreWithReading with sinaumedia.

Origin of Gamelan Musical Instruments, Examples of Gamelan Musical Instruments & How to Play Gamelan Musical Instruments – Discussing Javanese culture is incomplete if you don’t talk about gamelan musical instruments. This traditional Indonesian musical instrument is still being preserved until now and is even known to foreign countries. Gamelan consists of several traditional musical instruments such as the gong, saron, bonang, pelog, and other musical instruments used in karawitan art. 

Sinaumed’s needs to know that gamelan is one of Indonesia’s original traditional ensemble music that has been around for a long time. So getting to know gamelan musical instruments can be our way as the younger generation to preserve Indonesian culture. The following is an explanation of gamelan, starting from the meaning, history, types, to the various musical instruments in it: 

UNDERSTANDING OF GAMELAN INSTRUMENTS

Gamelan is a form of musical ensemble that refers to the unity of musical instruments that are sounded together. The word gamelan comes from the Javanese word gamel which means to beat or hit which is then followed by the ending an so that it means a noun. Gamelan performances are often found in traditions on the islands of Java, Bali, Madura, Lombok with various types and sizes of gamelan ensembles. 

According to Javanese belief, gamelan was first created by the god Sang Hyang Era Saka, the ruler of the land of Java. The first time a gamelan musical instrument was created was the gong which was used to summon the gods at that time. Finally created other musical instruments as complete as the gamelan that we know today. 

Due to the popularity of the gamelan at that time, this musical instrument developed rapidly during the Majapahit era and even spread outside Java, such as Bali and Sunda. Gamelan musical instruments in every region in Indonesia have characteristics that are different from one another, for example from the color of the sound that is created because they also use different musical instruments. For example, the Sundanese gamelan is more seductive because it is combined with traditional Sundanese musical instruments, namely the flute. 

The function of gamelan is usually used to accompany wayang kulit and dance performances in certain events. The development of gamelan until now has been able to become a separate musical instrument performance that is of interest to many people. Gamelan performances are usually accompanied by a sinden as a singer. Sinaumed’s may already be familiar with gamelan performances in palaces or wayang events. 

HISTORY & ORIGIN OF GAMELAN INSTRUMENTS

Gamelan has a long history in the civilization of Indonesian society from the royal period in the 8th century to the 11th century. The emergence of gamelan developed from the Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms in Sumatra, Bali and Java. This can be seen in the Borobudur temple monument where there are relief images of gamelan ensembles from the era of the Sriwijaya kingdom in the 6th to 13th centuries AD. 

Royal and noble families at that time were expected to learn and master this instrument. Even in ancient times, someone who could play the gamelan was considered to be brave and wise. Gamelan in the era of the Majapahit kingdom was growing rapidly until there was a schedule for gamelan performances at the court. 

The development of gamelan then continued after the entry of Islam into the archipelago which used artistic methods to spread its religion. Sunan Bonang was one of the walisongo and became the most famous propagator of Islam at that time. In spreading Islam, Sunan Bonang then combined gamelan which was thick with Hindu-Buddhist culture as a medium for conveying Islamic teachings. This method was characteristic of Sunan Bonang and indeed aimed to adapt it to the culture of the Javanese people at that time so that their preachings could be more acceptable.  

EXAMPLES OF GAMELAN MUSIC INSTRUMENTS & HOW TO PLAY GAMELAN INSTRUMENTS

1. Kendhang

2. Sharon

 How to play the saron instrument is to hit the metal blade using the right hand and hold the previously beaten blade using the left hand to eliminate the remaining buzzing sound. This method is commonly referred to as sculpting or squeezing techniques .  

3. Dumble

As with the saron, demung is also included in the balungan group in gamelan instruments. Usually there are two types of demung, pelog and slendro in gamelan. This instrument produces the lowest octave tone from the other balungan groups, despite its largest physical size. The method of playing demung is similar to that of the saron, except that the demung percussion is larger and heavier than the saron percussion. 

4. Bonang

Bonang is a gamelan instrument in the form of a kettle or pot placed on a string (rope) in a wooden frame (rancak). Each pot then has a convex shaft (pencon) at the top as the center to be hit. Bonang is included in pencon exit which is a musical instrument made of metal and has a concave shape underneath with a convex shaft to be hit. 

There are several types of bonang in the gamelan set, namely bonang successor, barung, and panembung. The way to play boning is to hit the hollow or cover with a special bat. 

5. Kenong

Kenong is also included in the pencon family like boning in gamelan instruments. The difference is that kenong has a physical form that is fatter than other pencon instruments. The kenong is then placed on a pangkon made of wood which has a rope base so that it does not hinder the kenong’s vibrations when it is beaten. This instrument produces a low sound but still loud with a distinctive timbre. How to play kenong is similar to playing bonang by hitting with a special stick in the hollow or lump of the kenong.  

6. Gongs

Almost similar to the bonang and kenong, the gong also has a convex shape at the top with a larger size and a hanging position, not placed in a certain layer. Resembling a large disk, gongs are made of melted metal such as bronze and copper to produce a distinctive sound. The way to play this instrument is to hit the convex part using a special stick.  

7. Kempul

Kempul is a gamelan instrument that is played which is almost similar to a gong but has a smaller size. The way to play it is the same as the gong, namely being hit with a special stick. Although the kempul belongs to the pencon family of musical instruments, it can be played with a tone like balungan music and can also precede the balungan tone. 

8. Xylophone

At first glance, the xylophone is similar to the saron and demung, but the blades of this musical instrument are made of wood or bamboo to produce a distinctive and unique sound. There are 18 chords on the xylophone which sit above a boat-shaped connector rack. The blades are arranged sequentially from the smallest blade shape to the longest. How to play the gambang instrument is to hit each number using a special beater called a percussion. Almost similar to the saron and demung, Sinaumed’s also needs to hold the say after being hit so that it doesn’t leave a sound. 

9. Slenthem

The slenthem instrument is one of the gamelan instruments that is included in the balungan family such as the saron and demung. This musical instrument produces a low pitch hum or echoes following the tones of other balungan musical instruments. In a gamelan set there is usually a slendro version of the slenthem with a range of C, D, E, G, A, C, and pelog with a range of C to B notes. 

10. Gender

Gender is a Javanese and Balinese gamelan instrument made of metal with which each blade is struck. There are 10 to 14 blades on a gender instrument made of brass which are then suspended from a string above a bamboo or zinc resonator. The way to play this instrument is to hit each blade with a special bat, namely a wooden percussion (Balinese) or cloth-covered (Javanese). In a complete gamelan set, there are three types of gender used, namely slendro, pelog pathet nem lan lima, and pelog pathet barang. 

11. Siter

The zither is a gamelan instrument that is played by picking it like the guzheng musical instrument from China or the zither from India. This musical instrument is rarely found or used in gamelan sets today. This musical instrument is also commonly called the Javanese guitar which has a distinctive sound. Measuring 20 x 50 cm, the zither is made of teak wood with 13 to 14 strings. 

The siter instrument has two sides with different tones, namely the pelog and slendro sides. Siter is considered as a musical instrument that adopts Indian musical instruments because it is almost the same as Sitar which is a traditional Indian musical instrument. 

12. Rebab

The rebab is an important gamelan instrument for elaborating and embellishing basic melodies. How to play it does not have to match the scale of other musical instruments, aliases can be created freely. This instrument is also part of an ensemble that is played openly. 

13. Flute

The flute is a gamelan instrument which is played by blowing it and is made of bamboo. Soft sound gives a characteristic to the unity of gamelan music. This musical instrument is considered to come from West Java or Sunda. 

14. Where

How to play this instrument is to be beaten and combined according to other traditional musical instruments. Players will hit the sides and swipe slightly to make a sound. If the body hole is closed, then where will it produce a distinctive tone. 

15. Gendrums

Gendrum is a gamelan instrument that is included in hybrid musical instruments such as drums and drums which was designed by Siswo Harsono in 1992. This musical instrument is usually found in Semarang’s Gambang, Jaipongan, Campursari, or dangdutan arts. The drum consists of jaipong drums, bar drums, ketipung or panepak, large ketipung, bongo, cowbells, bass drum and cymbals such as ride, cerash, splash and china. 

The way to play this instrument is to hit it with the palm of the hand which is played by a drum player, not a percussionist. This musical instrument can produce harmony in other traditional musical instruments. 

TYPES OF GAMELANDS

After knowing the various musical instruments played in gamelan performances, actually the type of gamelan itself has several differences. The thing that distinguishes it is usually the composition of the traditional musical instruments used and their needs. The following are the types of gamelan that Sinaumed’s needs to know:

1. Big Gamelan

The gedhe type of gamelan consists of a complete ricikan, starting from the slendro tunings to the pelog tunings. This type of gamelan is usually used in concerts or musical performances or uyon-uyon. 

2. Wayang Gamelan

From the name, this type of gamelan is used to accompany wayang performances. In addition to the slendro tunings, the pelog tuning for gamelan is also used for gamelan accompanying middle wayang and gedog puppet shows. 

3. Pakurmatan Gamelan

Pakurmatan gamean is divided into three, namely monggang, caribbean, and kodhok ngrek. This gamelan functions as an accompaniment to ceremonies honoring Javanese culture, such as Grebeg Mulud, welcoming guests, and circumcisions or marriages to the royal family. 

4. Gamelan Sekaten

In the Yogyakarta and Surakarta palaces, the sekaten type gamelan will be used once a year. Namely to commemorate the birth of the Prophet Muhammad SAW on 6-12 Mulud (Javanese calendar) and the sekaten gamelan is played in the courtyard of the Grand Mosque. 

5. Gamelan Gadon

Gamelan Gadohon consists of a composition of drums, zither, gender, slentem, xylophone and gongs only. This type of gamelan is used for the needs of people who have climen (simple) intentions, namely circumcision, 5 after the child’s birthday, moving house, birthdays and so on.

6. Gamelan Cokekan

Gamelan cokekan is a type of gamelan used for singing. The musical instruments in this gamelan only consist of zithers, drums, and gongs made of wood or gongs. 

7. Gamelan Senggani (Sengganen)

Senggani gamelan is made of iron and brass in the form of smaller blades and is more practical. This gamelan consists of bonang barung, bonang successor, demung, sarin, slenthem, drums, kempul and kenong. This type of gamelan is usually used for musical practice in villages to accompany the tayub dance. 

So that’s an explanation of gamelan musical instruments that Sinaumed’s needs to know about as an effort to recognize and preserve Indonesian culture. Does Sinaumed’s still have difficulty distinguishing gamelan instruments? Gamelan does have very authentic musical characteristics and has a long historical record for Indonesian culture. It would be a shame if this culture became extinct let alone controlled by other countries. 

We know that many foreign people then learn gamelan musical instruments. Do not let us as owners of this original culture lose out in knowing and mastering this traditional musical instrument. If sinaumedia is interested in getting to know and learning more about gamelan musical instruments, you can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com and www.ebooks.sinaumedia.com . 

Sinaumed’s will find many references that can increase knowledge about traditional musical instruments native to Indonesian culture. The following is a recommendation for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read about gamelan musical instruments and several other traditional musical instruments: Enjoy learning. #Friends Without Limits

Organs of the human body – In the human body there are various types consisting of cells, tissues, organs, and organ systems. The parts that compose and form the human body perfectly are called organ systems.

This system consists of various types of organs with specific structures and functions. Directly or indirectly, every organ system is interdependent, without the cooperation of other organs, this process does not occur in the body.

According to Brum (1994) Humans have nine organ systems namely the digestive system, respiratory system, circulatory system, excretory system, motor or movement system, reproductive system, nervous system, integumentary system and endocrine system.

Organ systems in humans as a group of organs that support each other and work together so that the body continues to function as it should. Health is the most important thing, so that the health of the human body is determined by whether or not the function of the organ system is good.

 

Definition of Human Body Organs

An organ is a collection of tissues that have one or more functions. Based on its location, the organs of the body are divided into two, namely internal organs and external organs. The organs in the body consist of the heart, kidneys, stomach and intestines. As for the external organs of the body are the nose and skin.

Of the various types of human organs work together and form an organ system in the human body. If one organ does not function properly, it will have an impact on other organs of the body.

Therefore, it is very important to maintain the function of the organ systems so that the body’s health is maintained.

Parts – Parts of the Organ System of the Human Body

Based on its function, the organ systems of the human body can be divided into several parts, including the following.

1. Sense System

The five senses or commonly called the sensory system in humans which consists of 5 senses. The five senses consist of eyes, ears, nose, tongue and skin. Each of them has its own function. The eyes are for seeing, the ears for hearing, the nose for smelling, the tongue for tasting, and the skin for feeling.

The skin itself is part of the integumentary system, which is the system that covers the internal organs of the body. Aside from being the sense of touch, the skin also functions to protect the body from harmful microorganisms and chemicals, regulates body temperature and keeps the body from losing fluids too quickly.

2. Cardiovascular System

The cardiovascular system is also known as the circulatory system. The cardiovascular system consists of the heart (cardio) and blood vessels (vascular) . This system is responsible for ensuring blood circulation to run smoothly, namely by pumping and circulating blood throughout the body so it is often called the transportation system.

Blood itself is a means of transportation for oxygen, nutrients, and other important substances such as hormones to be circulated throughout the body. In addition, blood is responsible for carrying toxic substances such as carbon dioxide so that they can be removed from the body. The circulatory system in the human body is the heart and blood vessels.

The heart is in charge of pumping blood throughout the body. Besides the heart, there are blood vessels that can support the circulatory system. Blood circulating in the veins throughout the body is called a closed loop. Blood vessels are divided into capillaries, arteries and veins according to their function.

The human circulatory system as a closed circulatory system because blood will flow in and out of the body through the blood vessels and blood will flow through the heart twice. Therefore, it is called a dual circuit which has the following elements.

a. Systematic Circuit

Systematic circuit is usually called the main circuit. Systematic blood flow as blood flow that removes oxygen-rich blood from the left ventricle of the heart / ventricle and will distribute it to the body’s tissues. Oxygen is exchanged for carbon dioxide in body tissues. The carbon dioxide-rich blood is then transported through the veins to the right atrium of the heart.

b. Pulmonary Circulation

Pulmonary circulation as a circulatory system that will carry blood from the heart to the lungs and back to the heart. Carbon dioxide-rich blood from the right ventricle is carried via the pulmonary artery to the lungs, where it is exchanged for oxygen-rich blood in the lung sacs and flows through the pulmonary veins to the left atrium of the heart.

3. Respiratory System

One of the organ systems that have a vital role for human survival is the respiratory system. This system functions to take oxygen from the inhaled air and remove carbon dioxide as the rest of metabolism from the body.

The respiratory system organs themselves consist of two parts, namely the upper and lower respiratory system organs. The organs of the upper respiratory system include the nasal cavities, sinuses, pharynx and webs. The lower respiratory system organs themselves include the trachea, bronchi, diaphragm and lungs.

In the respiratory system respiration occurs which is the process of exchanging gases between organisms and the environment. Oxygen is the main requirement when breathing, besides that it is also needed for burning or oxidizing food such as sugar or glucose. This process helps produce energy for daily activities such as growth, maintaining body temperature, burning somatic cells and muscle contraction.

Not only produces energy, breathing also produces carbon dioxide and water vapor. So that the respiratory system is supported by organs with various forms and functions.

The respiratory system also has a different structure and function. The lungs can be compared to the two synovial bursa of the stomach where the inside is connected to the outside air via the airways.

The inside is very large and consists of alveolar eye sacs with very thin walls. Gas exchange occurs in the alveoli. During the breathing process, the oxygen taken can oxidize the food produced by the digestion of food.

4. Digestive System

Every human being needs food from plants and animals. Food that enters the stomach and is digested or broken down into smaller and simpler parts or molecules. This process will take place in the digestive system. Food is absorbed by the digestive tract and circulated throughout the body in the form of small molecules.

This digestive system allows the body to be able to receive food, then it is processed into nutrients and energy that are more easily absorbed by the body. The process of food metabolism will become energy and nutrition which involves the digestive system consisting of several organs such as the mouth, esophagus, stomach, liver, pancreas, intestines and anus.

In the digestive system, pulping is divided into two, namely mechanical pulping and chemical pulping. Mechanical digestion as a process of changing food from coarse to small or refined. This process takes place on the teeth in the mouth.

Chemical digestion is a process that uses enzymes to change food from complex substances into simpler substances, which occurs in the mouth, stomach and intestines. These enzymes contain chemicals that the body produces to drive the chemical reactions of food in the body.

The organs of the human body involved in the digestive system are as follows.

a. Mouth

The process of digesting food begins where food enters the mouth and the oral cavity begins in the digestive tract. Mechanical and chemical contamination occurs in the mouth. Organs that work in the mouth such as the tongue, teeth and salivary glands. Which play a role in the mechanical digestion of food by chewing, namely the tongue and teeth.

b. Esophagus

Digested food in the mouth is sent to the esophagus. The esophagus is shaped like a hose or water tube with a length of about 25-30 cm. it begins in the chest, behind the neck, behind the pharynx and behind the heart and ends in the abdomen through the septum of the body cavity in front of the spine.

c, Stomach

The stomach as a digestive tract that expands like a pouch, is located at the top of the left abdominal cavity and is partially covered by the liver and spleen. The shape of the hull is like the letter J.

d. Heart

The liver is located below the septum of the body cavity and fills most of the upper part of the right abdominal cavity. The liver itself produces bile and collects in the gallbladder.

e. Pancreas

The pancreas is located on the posterior abdominal wall and to the left of the spleen. The end is in the duodenal loop. This pancreatic duct leads to the duodenum along with the bile duct.

f. Small intestine

The small intestine is a tube that is about 2.5 cm in diameter. When stretched, the small intestine can reach a length of about 6 meters.

g. Colon

The small intestine can absorb nutrients. Substances that cannot be absorbed are pushed into the large intestine.

h. anus

The lower part of the intestinal axis eventually leads to the anal canal which then expels the feces.

5. Reproductive System

The reproductive system in men and women is different. For males, the reproductive system includes all the organs used during sexual intercourse to produce offspring such as the penis, testicles, epididymis, and vas deferens.

Meanwhile, the female reproductive system includes all the organs needed for sexual intercourse, pregnancy and childbearing. These reproductive organs include the vagina, uterus, ovaries and fallopian tubes.

The human reproductive system is divided into male and female reproductive organs.

a. Male Reproductive Equipment

The male reproductive organs are divided into two, namely the external reproductive organs and the internal reproductive organs. The external genitalia consist of the penis and scrotum. The external reproductive organs consist of the testes, vas deferens, urethra and gonads.

b. Female Reproductive Equipment

In the female reproductive organs can be divided into two, namely the external reproductive organs and internal reproductive organs. Examples of external female reproductive organs are the vulva, labium and genital tract. The vulva is the outer opening in the female reproductive organs which is surrounded by a pair of right and left lips. These lips are called labia. The vulva leads to two channels, namely the urinary tract and genitals / vagina.

While the female reproductive organs consist of the ovaries, genital tract and vagina.

 

 

6. Urogenital System

The urogenital system consists of the kidneys, urinary tract, bladder and urethra. This organ system has the function of filtering toxins, excess fluids and electrolytes, such as potassium and sodium in the blood.

After being filtered, the blood will be reabsorbed to be circulated throughout the body. While the remaining waste and toxic substances that have been filtered will be excreted through the urine.

Besides functioning to dispose of urine, the urogenital system is also useful for regulating the amount of electrolytes and body fluids and can ensure the acid-base level or blood pH is at normal levels.

7. Nervous and Musculoskeletal System

The nervous system consists of all the nerve cells in the body, both sensory nerves and motor nerves. This nervous system allows humans to feel, understand and respond to the surrounding environment. In addition, the nervous system also has a role in the body to move together with the musculoskeletal system.

The musculoskeletal system consists of muscles (musculo) and bones (skeletal). In general, this system has the function of moving the body, maintaining body posture and balance, generating body heat through metabolism and protecting organs in the body.

8. Endocrine System

This system includes the hypothalamus in the brain and a series of glands whose job it is to produce hormones. The role of hormones is to control various bodily functions such as breathing, metabolism, reproduction, movement, growth, sensory perception and sexual development.

The glands of the body that are part of the endocrine system are the thyroid gland, adrenal glands, pancreas, testes and ovaries.

9. Excretion System

This system is a human organ system that has the function of removing metabolic waste products and other substances that are considered toxic by the body. This system consists of the skin, liver, large intestine, lungs and kidneys.

a. Skin

The skin is an excretory tool that removes dirt in the form of sweat. This sweat contains waste products especially salt. The structure of the human skin itself consists of the epidermis, dermis and hypodermis.

b. Heart

The liver has a function related to the digestive system. Among them the function of the liver is related to the function of excretion, namely to produce bile. Bile is produced when red blood cells are broken down.

c. Lungs

The location of the lungs on the left and right of the human chest cavity which is protected by the ribs. The lungs consist of two parts. The right lung has three lobes and the left lung has two lobes.

d. Kidney

The kidneys will filter the blood and act as a means of excretion, allowing residues in the blood to be excreted in the form of urine. Urine that is released every day is the result of the urinary system. This system can maintain the body’s water balance, maintain the volume and composition of fluids in the body and regulate the pH of fluids.

10. Immune System

The immune system or commonly called the immune system includes specialized cells such as white blood cells and lymphocytes and the lymphatic system which consists of the spleen, liver, thymus gland and lymph nodes.

The immune system has a role to detect the presence of harmful or toxic substances, cancer cells and various causes of infection such as viruses, bacteria, fungi and parasites. Then, the immune system will produce antibodies to destroy these harmful substances or cells.

The functions of organ systems in humans are different, but will be interrelated and mutually support one another. Keeping the organ systems functioning optimally is very important to ensure that the body stays healthy.

Apart from that, several things are needed to maintain the health of the body’s organs, for example by living a healthy lifestyle, carrying out regular health checks to the doctor, especially if we are at risk of experiencing certain diseases.

That’s an explanation of the organs of the human body . If Sinaumed’s needs other information regarding human organs, you can read and get his books at sinaumedia.com so you have #MoreWithReading information.

Sinaumed’s, Organizational culture generally shapes the behavior of employees in an organization. So that when someone enters an organization or company, he will then follow the customs, habits and culture that dominate the organization. Check out a more complete explanation of the meaning, function, characteristics and types of organizational culture below:

Definition of Organizational Culture

Organizational culture as a characteristic of an organization then becomes a guideline for the organization in a way that differentiates it from other organizations. Organizational culture itself functions as norms of behavior and values ​​that are understood and accepted by every member of the organization and which are used as the basis for organizational rules.

In addition, organizational culture can also be defined simply as how things are done. Organizational culture involves a set of experiences, expectations and values ​​contained therein which are then reflected in member behavior, philosophy, practice, internal work, interactions with the environment outside the organization, and expectations for the future.

There are also those who describe that organizational culture then involves rules, assumptions, language, symbols, norms, vision, systems, beliefs, habits, symbols, and written and unwritten values ​​(Needle, 2004). Organizational Culture is also known as the basic philosophy of the organization that shapes the beliefs, norms, and values ​​that exist within it which are fully discussed in the Second Ed Organizational Culture book.

Definition of Organizational Culture According to Experts

As explained in the previous definition of organizational culture, leaders then play an important role in shaping the organizational culture. Therefore the function of organizational culture in general is further divided into several things, including increasing employee loyalty to a company. It can also be used as a tool for organizing members, as a tool for reinforcing organizational values, as a mechanism that controls behavior in the work environment so that can encourage all structures to improve performance both in the short and long term.

Organizational culture also serves as a determining factor in management, what can then be done and what cannot. Sinaumed’s can find learning about organizational culture and how to build and develop organizational culture in the Organizational Culture book.

Several experts in the field of sociology have explained the notion of organizational culture, here are some of them:

Mondy and Noe (1996)

According to Mondy and Noe, organizational culture is a system of shared values, beliefs, and habits in an organization that interact with its formal structure and then creates behavioral norms.

Sarpin (1995)

According to Sarpin, the definition of organizational culture is a system of values, beliefs, and habits within an organization that interact with one another’s formal system structures to then produce organizational behavior norms.

Scheins

According to Schein, the definition of organizational culture is a pattern of various basic assumptions that are found, created, or developed by a group with the aim of learning organizations to overcome and overcome problems that arise as a result of adaptations of external and internal integration that are already going well.

In this way, organizational culture must be taught to all new members as the right way to perceive, think and feel these issues.

Nawawi (2003)

According to Nawawi, the relationship between culture and organizational culture includes “organizational culture is a belief and values ​​that become the main philosophy that is firmly held by members of the organization in carrying out or operationalizing organizational activities”.

Hodge, Anthony, and Wales (1996)

According to Hodge, Anthony, and Wales, organizational culture is a construction of two levels of characteristics, namely organizational characteristics that cannot be observed and which can be observed.

Larissa A. Grunig

According to Larissa A. Grunig organizational culture is the totality of values, hopes, symbols, meanings, assumptions, which in organizing a group are then able to work together.

Luthans (1998)

According to Luthans, organizational culture is the values ​​and norms that guide the behavior of a member of the organization. All of these members will then behave according to the dominant culture so that later they can be accepted by their organizational environment.

Susanto

According to Susanto, the definition of organizational culture according to Susanto is values ​​which are then used as guidelines for human resources to make it happen, dealing with external problems and efforts to adjust organizational integration, so that each member of the organization is then required to understand the existing values ​​and how they should behave. or behave.

Robbins

According to Robbins, organizational culture is a system of shared meaning that is owned by each member that distinguishes one organization from another.

Gareth R.Jones

According to Gareth R.Jones The definition of organizational culture is a shared perception that is owned by each member of the organization, or a system of shared meaning.

Walter R. Freytag

According to Walter R, the definition of organizational culture is the various assumptions and values ​​that are realized or not realized that can unite an organization. These assumptions and values ​​determine the behavior patterns of members of the organization.

Functions of an Organization

For the Continuity of the organization’s business functions include Facilitating Making Planning. Organizational functions in management include making it easier for you to plan. Organizational functions include facilitating management in making analysis and evaluation reports on company or business performance. The following are some explanations regarding organizational functions for business continuity:

1. Obtain Various Information

The function of the organization is not only as a place for a group of people in a company to achieve common goals. But organizational functions can also be used as a place to get information. In a corporate organization, of course you will meet other members.

Because in the organization you will meet other members. Apart from that, you can also get various kinds of information from other members, apart from physical information, you can also get information by holding an online meeting with other colleagues. With organizational functions you will then get various important things that support the continuity of your business.

2. Helps Achieve a Target

Organizational functions in a business include making it easier for you to break down work carried out in an activity plan, and the organization will then be grouped into one group according to each position.

And after being grouped, it will be made into a structure by giving each task in the organizational group, the purpose of this organization is to achieve a target to be achieved.

3. Develop Public Speaking Skills

By becoming a leader, public speaking is the most important thing in communicating with many people and even other business people. But in public speaking there is still a leader who does not refer to skills in public speaking.

To practice this you can then start yourself by practicing speaking to organizations, such as an employee, or other organizations. This organizational function can also develop and train oneself in public speaking, such as expressing opinions, giving speeches, and so on.

Starting from speaking in front of fellow members of the organization, it is hoped that this public speaking ability will continue to develop into a wider environment.

4. Train Leadership Soul

In a business, training the spirit of leadership is very necessary, you don’t have to look up and down one’s position, every human being must also have a leadership spirit, both for himself and for others.

It is this organizational function that greatly influences the spirit of leadership and if you then become a leader in a company, it is hoped that you will have the character of a leader who can bring your organization and business forward and develop. As well as in the organization, leaders will also be taught how to make a wise decision without harming any party.

5. Facilitate Employee Task Determination

The next organizational function is to facilitate the company in distributing the tasks of employees. So that the tasks given by employees do not overlap. And of course, the existence of these organizational functions makes employees more optimal in working in each of their respective fields. This will then accelerate the company or business in achieving each predetermined target.

6. Increase morale

The function of the organization in a company or business is that the organization will make employees work together with other employees, according to the job description given. And with the existence of such an organization, there will be a solid relationship between employees in the company.

7. Simplify Salary Calculations

The organizational function within a company also assists business owners in overcoming financial difficulties and calculating employee remuneration. In this calculation, the compatibility with the workload, the responsibilities given, and in accordance with the position of the employee concerned are also seen.

Where if this employee then has a high position level position, then he will have greater responsibility and the remuneration received will also be greater.

The existence of an organization makes the calculation of employee salary expenses more efficient. You can learn various functions and other aspects through the book Behavior & Organizational Culture.

Characteristics of Organizational Culture

According to Samdeep and Lylesusman in Siswanto and Sucipto he classifies eleven characteristics of a superior corporate culture. Namely among others the unshakable belief that people are the company’s most important resource. Here are some other characteristics of organizational culture:

•   Entrepreneurial support or rewarding employees who help the company achieve its mission.
•   Control based more on loyalty and commitment than rules and compliance.
•   Commitment to goals is higher than their commitment to personal group goals.
•   Top management commitment in producing superior products or other services.
•   Belief in the importance of rituals, ceremonies and corporate heroes.
•   Belief in the importance of information, both good news and bad news.
•   Awareness of upward communication is more important than downward communication. Top management support for training and development commitment to always be superior to its competitors.
•   A view that values ​​truth as well as risk taking and creativity.
•   According to Fremont E Kast and James E. Rosenzweig in Siswanto and Sucipto (2008: 146) concluded that there are eight cultural characteristics that bring an organization to success including the tendency to act close to customers, autonomy and entrepreneurship, productivity, providing value stimulation, surviving. on organizational cultural values ​​that are adhered to, simple, easily understood by employees.

Types of an Organization

Organizational culture is one of the opportunities to build Human Resources through aspects of changing attitudes and behavior that are expected to be able to adapt to ongoing and future challenges. Organizational culture which is often referred to as a certain pattern of attitudes, beliefs and feelings that form the basis of an organization is discussed in the book Organizational Culture.

Organizational culture is an invisible social force, and can move people in an organization to carry out work activities. The organization itself consists of various types, based on various considerations, respectively, as follows:

 

Based on personal organizational relationships

subdivided into formal, official organizations, usually those that already have legal entities and informal organizations formed due to common interests or personal needs or the need for a common goal.

formal organization

formed by a group of people or society that has a structure that is well formulated, and explains the relations of authority, power, accountability and responsibility, and has the force of law.

Types of Business Organizations Based on Their Objectives and Existing Structures also explain how the forms of communication channels are formed. Then shows the tasks specified for each member.

Examples of formal social organization

Among them are the Church, public schools, public charity, hospitals, public clinics, political organizations, Community assistance in matters of legislation, Volunteer service organizations, Trade unions.

Informal Organization (Unofficial)

Membership in informal organizations can be achieved both consciously and unconsciously, and it is often difficult to determine the exact time a person has been a member of these organizations.

The exact nature of the relationships between members and even the goals of the organizations concerned are not specified. Examples of informal organizations include informal meetings such as dinner together.

Informal organizations can be converted into formal organizations if the relationships within them and the activities carried out are structured and formulated.

Sole Proprietorship

Based on the number of people in a single organization with all tasks coming from one leader and a commission organization that has a board for each field of work.

Private Company According to Law no. 3 of 1982 Compulsory Company Registration Article 1B, what is meant by a company is any form of business that carries out any type of business that is permanent and continuous in nature and is domiciled within the territory of the State of Indonesia with the aim of obtaining profit or profit.

In other words, the Company is a business entity owned by one individual. All profits derived from this business entity are owned by the processor and the manager also bears all the risks involved.

In the establishment of an individual company then it is not regulated in the Criminal Code and no agreement is made. Because, only founded by one entrepreneur only.

 

Based on the party using the principle of benefit

Mutual benefit organizations, namely organizations whose benefits are primarily enjoyed by their members, such as cooperatives, while service organizations , namely organizations whose benefits are enjoyed by customers, such as banks, business organizations , organizations engaged in the business world, such as companies.

commonwealth organization n

is an organization whose benefits are mainly enjoyed by the general public, such as health service organizations. For example hospitals, health centers.

• Based on life in society there are various types of organizations including health, education, agriculture and other types according to the fields in society.

Based on the functions and objectives served, namely political organizations, custodians such as caring for the environment, integrative and production specifically according to their goals, Based on parties who use the benefits of the organization there are mutual benefit organizations that are enjoyed by their members, commonwealth organizations that are enjoyed by the general public, service organizations enjoyed by special customers and business will be enjoyed by consumers.

For example, if there are managerial matters in the government environment and various problems related to them, it is very important to have in-depth and detailed discussions within the organization. Sinaumed’s can find a complete discussion in the book Building Organizational Culture in Government Agencies.

In a traffic power is divided into 3, namely line or straight, that is, power only flows from the leadership of the organization, the line or staff leadership will be assisted by the chief of staff who is directly and functionally under them, whose functions will be led by people who are experts in their fields. .

Commitment in the Organization – In carrying out daily activities, we cannot be separated from the name of the organization. Whether it’s in the form of companies, non-governmental organizations (NGOs), trade unions, neighborhood associations, and others like that. In order for the organization to run as expected, it requires commitment from each individual involved. Without commitment, the course of the organization will be lame. So, how is the commitment in the organization?

Definition of Organizational Commitment

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary, commitment can be interpreted as an attachment to doing something. Commitment can be proven by the existence of alignments or tendencies because they feel they have a bond with something, be it a relationship, promise, work, trust, activities, and so on. Commitment describes the meaning of responsibility.

Commitment is very important for someone to have. The depth of one’s commitment can measure the amount of consistency and responsibility, whether in conditions that are easy or difficult, happy or difficult, light or heavy. Without commitment, there will be no consistency.

A good organization consists of highly committed people. The higher the value of commitment from each individual, the better the achievement of the organization. Committed people always give their best for what they are committed to.

Commitment in the organization can be interpreted as an attitude or behavior that is displayed by someone towards the organization by proving loyalty to achieve the vision, mission, values ​​and goals of the organization. Loyalty is formed because of mutual trust, emotional closeness, and alignment of expectations between members and the organization. Therefore, a member has a strong desire to remain an important part of the organization.

This definition is an abbreviated understanding of several definitions that have been submitted by experts. There are many experts who define organizational commitment that you can refer to. The following are some definitions of organizational commitment that we present to you.

1. Greenberg and Baron

In their journal published in 2003, Jerald Greenberg and Robert A. Baron define organizational commitment as the degree or measure in which an employee is involved in the course of his organization. He also has a desire to remain a part of it. During his time as part of the organization, he showed loyalty and willingness to work optimally.

2. Steers and Porters

Richard M. Steers and Lyman W. Porter define organizational commitment as the attitude of an employee in identifying himself with the goals and expectations of the organization. He did this identification to adjust to what the organization wanted. He also tries to maintain organizational membership to achieve common goals.

3. McShane and Von Glinow

Both said organizational commitment has a very strong influence in the organization. Someone will identify a demand that exists and he is motivated to make it happen, even when the source of motivation is no longer there.

4. Allen and Meyer

Both of these experts say that organizational commitment can be described in the form of emotional closeness, involvement, and individual identification in the operational implementation of the organization. This emotional closeness encourages a member to still want to be part of the organization.

Dimensions of Organizational Commitment

Organizational commitment has several different dimensions. Each dimension has a variety of explanations. The following are dimensions of organizational commitment that you need to know.

1. According to Allen and Mayer

Allen and Mayer divide organizational commitment into three dimensions, namely:

a. Affective Commitment

This commitment is guided by the emotional connection between members and the organization. Members have a strong desire to continue working within the organization because they have aligned goals and values. People who have high affective commitment want to stay there so that they fully support the goals of the organization and try to play a role in the progress of the organization.

This type of commitment relies on a sense of love for the organization. The will to survive arose from within their own hearts. There is no compulsion to survive.

b. Continuance Commitment

This commitment encourages someone to stay in the organization because of the profit or loss analysis they get. The economic value that is felt to be beneficial will encourage employees to remain in the organization rather than leaving it. In general, the longer a person has worked in an organization, the greater the fear of losing what has been invested so far.

This commitment makes someone to think again if they want to leave the organization. Leaving the organization will make life’s burden even heavier due to cost considerations. Plus the investment in the form of participation in the progress of the organization will simply disappear if he leaves the organization.

c. Normative Commitment

Someone has this commitment because they are burdened with the obligation to remain in the organization due to pressure from other parties. Employees with high levels of normative commitment are very concerned about what other people say about them. He didn’t want to disappoint his boss and was afraid that his co-workers would have bad thoughts because of his resignation.

In general, research has shown that employees with strong affective commitment decide to stay because they want to. While employees with high continuance commitment choose to stay because they have to live together there.

2. According to Curtis and Wright

Organizational commitment is divided into three dimensions, namely:

• Desire to remain a member of the organization.
• Believe in and accept the values ​​and goals of the organization.
• Ready to work hard wholeheartedly to contribute to the progress of the organization.

 

 

Benefits of Organizational Commitment

The existence of strong organizational commitment is certainly beneficial for many parties. Both members of the organization and the organization that oversees each benefit. Among the benefits obtained are:

• Organizational members will work in totality.
• The initiative of the members of the organization for high organizational progress will give birth to many innovations.
• A dynamic work environment makes the atmosphere not monotonous or boring.
• The level of solidarity is high, both among members and between departments, so as to create an atmosphere that works hand in hand.
• Members feel comfortable so they feel happy.
• Organizational members are willing to do their best, even when the source of motivation is no longer there.
• The organization becomes a missed place.
• Organizations thrive because the people in them are happy and responsible.

Factors Influencing Organizational Commitment

Organizational commitment certainly varies from one organization to another. The difference is due to the causal factors. This time we will discuss the factors that influence commitment in the organization.

1. Individual Characteristics

The characteristics referred to this time are divided into two types, namely demographic characteristics and dispositional characteristics. Demographic characteristics include age, gender , marital status, education level, ethnicity, and the length of time a person has worked in the organization. While dispositional characteristics include personality and values ​​maintained by members of the organization.

Dispositional characteristic factors have a stronger influence on organizational commitment. Because personality and values ​​are fundamental and motivate someone to work. Like a word, aging is certain but being mature is a choice.

Organizations where the majority are filled with people who carry positive values ​​such as being honest, loyal, willing to learn, agile, flexible, and polite, of course, are more likely to have high organizational commitment. These values ​​will dominate the organization. Thus, the organization is filled with people who are highly committed.

Conversely, an organization whose majority is filled with people who are lazy, dishonest, opportunistic, unwilling to develop, rigid, and impolite will produce a negative environment. The atmosphere will dominate the organization. Finally the organization is filled with people with low organizational commitment.

2. Organizational Characteristics

Organizational characteristics become an important factor affecting commitment in the organization. Things that are included in the character of the organization are the vision, mission, goals, organizational structure, policy design, and policy outreach. These characteristics shape the people within them thereby influencing how committed they are to their organization.

The aligned vision, mission and goals between members and the organization form a strong and deep organizational commitment. The stronger the commitment within the organization, the more positive the influence on the running of the organization. Therefore, aligning the vision, mission and goals is an important step to be carried out continuously.

The three points above are not enough to foster commitment within the organization without being accompanied by a wise policy. A good goal is not enough just to be a goal. Good goals need to be realized through policies that are implemented wisely as well.

3. Organizational Experience

In addition to organizational characteristics, organizational experience in carrying out its activities also influences organizational commitment. Organizations with mature experience in implementing policies are easier to create a conducive atmosphere. This will affect the quality of organizational commitment for the better.

The positive result of a mature organizational experience is the satisfaction of its members. This satisfaction encourages members to always be involved in efforts to progress the organization. Not only that, interpersonal relationships are also more intimate, even among staff, supervisors, managers, to directors.

Organizational Commitment Indicator

Commitment to the organization is usually measured by instruments that go through testing. Some experts try to develop instruments that can measure the level of commitment of a person or team to their organization. The measurement is carried out by converting qualitative data to quantitative data so that a measurable value is obtained.

However, there are some universal indicators that you can use. These indicators are in the form of qualitative assessments. Organizations whose members have high commitment can be shown by strong trust and acceptance of organizational goals, a strong will to advance the organization, and a desire to retain members in the organization.

 

 

How to Build Organizational Commitment

After understanding the definitions, factors, dimensions, and indicators of organizational commitment, it is incomplete if we don’t talk about ways to build commitment. Some of the steps below are recommendations recommended by Gary Dessler, an expert in human resources management .

1. Make It Charismatic

The most fundamental in the organization is the vision, mission, goals, and values. For those of you who are currently leading an organization, it is important for you to make the basic guidelines of the organization something sacred, charismatic, and of high value. The basic foundation of the organization must earn the respect of its members.

2. Build the Tradition

Positive values ​​in the organization should be maintained and cultivated so that they become habits that should be emulated by the next generation. This habit will give birth to a positive tradition as well. A positive tradition within the organization will give birth to people with great character, all of which will benefit the organization.

3. Have Comprehensive Grievance Procedures

Complaints or complaints about the organization’s products or services may occur. Both from internal and external parties. Preparing the right steps in handling complaints can foster organizational commitment because the organization has clear guidelines.

4. Create a Sense of Community

Creating a sense of belonging within the organization is essential for organizational commitment to form. You need to do things that are unique, effective, efficient, and maybe a little out of the box to form a sense of togetherness, cooperation, sense of belonging, sharing and more. All of that is important so that work in the organization is not just a mere task formality.

5. Build Value Homogeneity

It is undeniable that discrimination can hamper the positive growth of an organization. Building an egalitarian (all are equal) yet respectful culture is one way you can build organizational commitment in your team. For example, everyone has the same rights and opportunities to get a promotion, which is based on ability, contribution, work performance, diligence, acuity of vision, and interest.

6. Support Employee Development

The staff or people you lead are essentially not just people you can order according to your wishes. They are the people who are entrusted to you for you to cultivate so that they have a great contribution to the organization. By looking at it from that perspective, you will pay more attention to development as staff and as people.

The more he is given the opportunity to develop himself, the higher the value of his contribution to the company. Not only that, his respect for you will grow even greater. If that’s the case, then his commitment to the organization will form by itself.

7. Put in Writing

Avoiding “he said” without accurate data is a great way to develop a good work ethic in an organization. The culture of following “he said” reduces the ability to do analysis, investigation, development, and discipline. Data regarding vision, mission, history, philosophy, policies, calculations, forecasts, and strategies is very important to write down so that members work based on written data, not just “what they said”.

8. Here Right-Kind Managers

Many people don’t work for organizations, but for their managers. The quality of work of the majority members is influenced by the quality of the manager. The members’ commitments are no exception.

A good leader does not only use his authority in leading. He will use his authority as a leader to protect his members. In leading, he will use his charisma more, rather than using his skills or authority.

Leaders or managers with leadership skills like this will be liked by many members. As a result, members of the organization feel comfortable and ready to give their all for the organization. If you have reached that point, the formation of deep commitment within the organization is only a matter of time.

9. Walk the Walk

Sweet words or slogans without implementation will only be a beautiful theory. As a leader, it is very important to set an example for its members in doing something for the organization. Members who see how their leader does it will be moved to follow the same path.

Conclusion

The conclusion in this discussion is that commitment in the organization is very necessary for the progress of the organization itself. Commitment to the organization encourages its members to make an optimal contribution to their organization. Therefore, organizations need to establish a clear vision, mission, objectives and policies so that this commitment is formed.

There are many ways that you as a leader can do so that organizational commitment is formed. Being a leader is not only about how you give orders to the people you lead, but also about how you can develop their value as a human being. The existence of positive reciprocity between the organization and members fosters a strong commitment from members to the organizations they follow.

Orchestra Is – When talking about orchestral music, Sinaumed’s definitely thinks of musical performances on a stage in a large room with each of the personnel playing a different musical instrument. Yep, that thought is not wrong because orchestral performances are more or less what it is. Even though this orchestral performance is not original musical art from Indonesia, in our country it is in great demand by many people.

In orchestral performances, various forms of music will be presented, starting from solo musical performances, ensembles, to the orchestra itself. Usually, the type of music performed is classical music, although it is possible to perform other types of music as well. So what exactly is an orchestra? How is the history of the development of this musical art performance in Indonesia? Are there groups that exist in this Indonesian music wilderness? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands this, let’s look at the following!

Definition of Orchestra

According to John Spitzer, the term “orchestra” in ancient Greece and Rome referred to the basic level of an open stage, which was used again in the Renaissance, namely “the place in front of the stage”. Yep, at the beginning of the XVII century, the area in front of the stage was usually used as a place for musicians to accompany singing and dancing. Then in the following century, XVIII, the term “orchestra” was further expanded to refer to “a special place for musicians” and as a form of identity for these musicians as part of an ensemble.

According to KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary), “ensemble” is a standard form of ensemble which means “a group of musicians (singers) who play together regularly .” While “orchestra” means “the area located in front of the stage where the musicians sit”. 

Before the term “orchestra” appeared, there was a similar term that described a group of musicians in large numbers. For example, in Italy, the names for similar musicians are capella, concerto grosso, coro , and symphonia . Likewise in Paris, the terms for similar musicians are the terms les concertantes and les violons .

In a modern scope, usually the musical instruments used consist of four groups, namely stringed instruments, woodwind instruments ( woodwind section ), metalwind instruments, and percussion instruments.

Orchestral Characteristics

In an orchestral musical performance usually has interrelated characteristics, namely as follows:

• Based on the existence of a stringed instrument, which usually consists of a violin and a double bass. The group of stringed instruments is arranged into special parts, so that the musicians will always play the same notes in one voice.
• Woodwind, metalwind, and percussion instruments will appear in different numbers according to the period and the songs to be performed.
• Customize times, venues, and track listings by widely showing instrumentation standards,
• In groups that are well established and well organized, they will usually hold regular rehearsals and performances. Not only that, the group also has a good organizational structure and financial funds.
• Since it requires many musicians, it will require a high level of musical proficiency to play music properly.
• Basically coordinated directly from one center, namely a conductor.

If there is a musical group with a large number of personnel, but does not have these characteristics, then it cannot be called an orchestra.

Types of Orchestral Music

An orchestra actually has various types, each of which has differences and characteristics of each, namely as follows:

1. String Orchestra ( String Orchestra ), which is an orchestral group consisting of a number of stringed instruments only.
2. Symphony Orchestra , which is a large orchestral standard in which this group plays a symphonic work. Note that a symphony is a long piece of music performed by an orchestra, usually consisting of four parts.
3. Chamber Orchestra ( Chamber Orchestra) , which is a small orchestra with limited players.
4. Theater Orchestra ( Theater Orchestra ), namely an orchestra group that plays a symphony by including saxophone instruments and combo bands.
5. Philharmonic Orchestra , which is a complete orchestra that uses a variety of musical instruments from a symphony music.
6. Classical Orchestra ( Classical Orchestra ), which is an orchestra that plays a type of classical music and usually uses fewer musical instruments than symphonic pieces.
7. Eta symphony, namely playing symphonic music but in a shorter and simpler form.
8. Waltz Orchestra , which plays waltz music. Please note that waltz music is a type of music that is usually used to accompany ballroom dances .

A Brief History of the Development of the Orchestra

Actually, the emergence of the orchestra began with small groups of musicians for a festival or funeral. But in the days of the Roman empire, the existence of these musical groups was banned by the Roman government. Then, after the Roman empire collapsed, bands began to grow again by expanding the diversity of musical instruments.

The history of the development of the orchestra is increasingly visible in the 16th century, at which time there were many composers with the ability to write music for instrumental groups. Meanwhile, in the 15th and 16th centuries, especially in Italy, noble houses even had music groups whose job was to entertain the royal nobles. Then in the 17th century, along with the emergence of theatrical performances, especially opera, music was created more and more for groups of instruments. Well, this is where the emergence of the orchestra and known by the world, namely in the 18th and 19th centuries.

In the early 18th century, there was a special selection of musicians for an orchestra, which emphasized competence and talent in playing musical instruments. A composer named Johann Sebastian Bach at that time was in full control of the process of selecting music resources in his city, namely Eisenach, Germany.

In the development of classical music, a composer named Joseph Haydn was hired by the nobility to entertain the nobles at court. At the same time, there was a talented young musician named Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart who was giving concerts from city to city. At this time, the existence of the orchestra became a medium of entertainment, especially for the nobility and then it also developed by being performed in front of the wider community. Not only that, the orchestra began to be used to accompany music, especially in theatrical and opera performances.

In the modern era, orchestras also developed using stringed instruments, namely first violin, second violin, viola, cello , and contrabass . Then, with the development of the times, the musical instruments used in this orchestra group also developed, namely in 1680-1750 the oboe, bassoon , trumpet, and horn musical instruments appeared .

The development of the orchestra is of course influenced by the actions of composers, for example Beethoven and Wagner. Even at the beginning of the 19th century, a special standard emerged, namely the complement standard for woodwinds and metal instruments used in an orchestra, in line with the power of music by Ludwig van Beethoven .

The next development was sparked by Richard Wagner who founded a special orchestra to accompany musical drama performances. Wagner also gave the role of conductor as leader in an orchestra.

History of the Development of the Orchestra in Indonesia

The development of orchestras in the world also eventually spread to our country. The reason why orchestral music can enter Indonesia is because of the contact between Indonesia and the West. The influence of the West in terms of art has indeed proven concrete, as RM Soedarsono has expressed in 2022. He is of the opinion that the influence of Western nations, especially the Portuguese, who were later followed by the Dutch at the end of the 16th century, is very strong, with evidence of the many forms of Indonesian art that ” similar” to Western culture.

The earliest introduction to European music, especially the orchestra, occurred on the island of Java, which was brought by sailors who were in the middle of a stopover in the 16th century. One of the sailors who spread European music was Francis Drake . In his travel book, he explains that the ship’s musicians played music for a king on the island of Bali, and the king responded by playing local music. Although there is no clear identification of what local music is used, whether gamelan or other musical ensembles.

In 1921-1939, musical performances at the Yogyakarta Palace, namely during the reign of Sultan Hamengku Buwono VIII, experienced rapid progress with the presence of Walter Spies . Spies played a big role in the development of musical life in Yogyakarta and even got a permanent job as a music instructor as well as conductor at the Yogyakarta Palace Orchestra.

It is not only the Kraton Orchestrate Jogja that is proof of the development of orchestras in Indonesia, there is also the Societe de Vereeniging Orchestra which was founded by a plantation entrepreneur in Yogyakarta. The orchestra was conducted by Attilio Gnocchi from Italy and Carl Gotsch from Austria.

Although the development of orchestral music in Indonesia experienced ups and downs, the 1950s actually became the heyday of orchestral music, especially in Jakarta. Unfortunately, there is no recorded or physical evidence of the triumph of this music (based on the book Twilite Orchestra by Ninok Leksono). The existence of the Twilite Orchestra is proof that the orchestra has triumphed in Indonesia with its conductor, Addie MS .

Unfortunately, in 1998 there was an economic crisis that hit Indonesia, causing a downturn in people’s lives, including the survival of orchestral music. At that time, the Twilite Orchestra only gave a concert once, namely at the Tanah Airku Theater (TMII), whereas in previous years they were able to hold concerts five times a year.

Along with political and economic developments that are getting better, the state of orchestral music is growing again. Several other orchestral groups emerged, one of which was the Nusantara Symphony Orchestra coordinated by Miranda Goeltom , which focused on bringing out musical compositions by Bach, Mozart and other Western classical music.

At that time, the thought arose that audiences were only for the upper class, so Addie MS and his group tried to socialize that this thought was not true. Twilite Orchestra is trying to bridge the appreciation of the middle to lower class society for this music, namely by holding concerts in public places, starting from schools, colleges, and others. In its program, this group visits schools to introduce musical instruments commonly used in music, starting from the violin, flute, contrabass, cello , and others. They also taught briefly about how to play the musical instruments.

Not only that, this group will also arrange traditional songs which are familiar to the public into this music and present it to the general public.

Examples of Musical Instruments in an Orchestra

In an orchestra, three types of musical instruments are usually used, namely string, wind, and vocal instruments. However, it is not uncommon for vocals to be added, both vocally and as a group. Well, here are examples of musical instruments used in an orchestra.

Stringed instrument

1. Contrabass Violin

This instrument can be played in two ways, namely by swiping or picking. When used to accompany orchestras and tango types of music, it will be played in two ways. However, if it is to accompany jazz and blues types of music, it will be played by picking.

2. Harp

Namely musical instruments that are usually illustrated as musical instruments of angels. How to play it is to be picked on the strings. The shape of this musical instrument is very high so that it is not uncommon for the players to stand up so they can reach the strings.

3. Cello

This musical instrument actually has the original name Violoncello, but people often call it Cello. How to play it is by swiping with a special swipe tool. A cellist is usually called a cellist.

Wind instrument

1. Clarinet

Namely a musical instrument that is played with 1 reed. Usually, a clarinet player will be referred to as a Clarinetist.

2. Saxophone

That is a musical instrument that belongs to the aerophone group and how to play it is by blowing it.

3. Flutes

Namely a musical instrument that is played by being blown. Usually, the flute is often equated with the fagot, it’s just that the way to play it is different.

Percussion

1. Vibraphone

The shape of this instrument is almost similar to the xylophone and marimba. The difference is that this vibraphone has aluminum rods, while the two instruments use wooden rods. The way to play it is to hit the aluminum bars with a special beater.

2. Tubular Bells

Usually known as tubular bells, because their sound resembles church bells. How to play it is to hit it with a special bat.

3. Drums

This instrument is made of animal skin stretched in a round shape. The way to play it is by being hit, either with your bare hands or a special tool called a drum stick .

So, that’s a review of what an orchestra is and the history of its development, both in the world and in Indonesia. Has Sinaumed’s ever seen this show?

Operational Management – ​​Operational management is needed in a business to control production activities. A business requires supervision of several elements supporting its activities. Such as finance, marketing, and also production that goes into operational activities.

This management is a plan that focuses on production activities. His job is to ensure the production process is maintained and running as it should. This management must also ensure that the production process is maintained and its development goes according to plan.

The operations manager is fully responsible for the course of operational management. The operations manager is responsible for overseeing and managing operational processes. Starting from the process of converting raw material resources, energy, and labor into the form of goods and services, or in other words, you must be able to manage the process of converting inputs into outputs.

Operations manager is very important position in a business. Because operations are one of the company’s strategic functions. As is known, there are three strategic functions of the company, namely marketing, finance, and operations. Means that operational management has an important position to perfect the company’s strategy. It is also in the interests of ensuring the long-term survival of the company in good condition.

For more details, operational management is the management used to design strategies and organize corporate practice activities. Of course the ultimate goal is to increase the company’s income . The following are important points about operational management that you should understand.

Definition of Operational Management

Operational management activities are closely related to various company activities in changing the basic input series. Such as changing the input of raw materials, energy, consumer needs, information, company capabilities, company finances, and others into output for consumers.

The field of work is also broad, related to other parts of the company. As with marketing, sales, finance. This is where the real role of the operations manager is, which must be able to carry out operational management while being involved in its operational activities. Operations manager who is a liaison in every area of ​​production coverage to product distribution.

Operational management is closely related to the technology owned by the company. Businesses that have basic modern technology will clearly be more able to compete and survive. Conversely, companies that do not use technology will find it difficult to develop. As an example is the use of software in operational management to assist the production process, which currently has very limited references. Sinaumed’s can study it in the Operational Management Practicum book below.

It means that it has been answered, that operational management is indeed focused on the process of converting inputs into outputs. This management must be able to ensure that the company carries out the process properly, and is carried out efficiently as well as effectively.

The field of operational management work includes procuring goods or services from related sources, establishing good relations with parties involved in operational processes, and increasing the company’s ability to optimize resources.

The Importance of Operational Management for Companies

Why is operational management so important? This management helps several areas of operational management. As explained in the following points.

1. Helping companies achieve goals

Operational management assists companies in achieving company goals. This management must be able to ensure that all company activities run properly.

2. Helps increase worker productivity

Operations management helps workers be more productive. The operations manager as the person in charge of this management is obliged to train and educate the workers.

3. Helps increase goodwill

Good intentions here mean the company’s goal in carrying out its business is to provide customer satisfaction. Operations management helps the existence of the company, also helps to achieve this goodwill. This management ensures sending the best products for the sake of customer happiness.

To achieve this means operational management must be able to increase the utilization of company resources. Management must plan, control all activities, and ensure all resources are used efficiently.

4. Helps Motivate Employees

This management helps workers understand their role in the company. These workers are under the supervision of the operations manager so that they can work according to the portion given in a supportive atmosphere. Employees will also be given prizes and awards according to their performance.

Operational Management Objectives

1. This management aims to increase the efficiency of the company, also known as efficiency.
2. Has the goal of increasing the productivity of the company, also known as productivity.
3. Aiming to minimize the company’s expenses for various activities, also known as the economy.
4. Has the goal of improving the quality of the company, also known as quality.
5. Has the goal of controlling the production process time to a minimum, also known as reduced processing time.

Features of Operational Management

Basically there are three characteristics of operational management, namely:

1. Have the goal of producing goods and services.

The very first feature of this management is having the goal of managing all production activities of goods and services to generate income. This management is in charge of controlling all production activities and ensuring the company earns profits.

2. Has a change process activities

The process of changing or transforming is the entire activity or part of the activity that takes one or several inputs, changes them, then provides use value, so that in the end it becomes output for consumers.

Examples of transformations for inputs will be easier to identify if their form is clear. For example, yarn inputs are turned into cloth, or flour is turned into pastries and cakes. However, identification will be difficult if what is changed is the input of people or information. For example, a clinic that changes the input of sick people to healthy ones. Then the television stations that turn the interview results into news.

3. There is a control mechanism for an operation

The last characteristic of operational management is the existence of a mechanism to control the operations of a business. This mechanism must be applied to all business departments, such as for improving product quality, reducing waste, as well as increasing sales.

Operations Management Function

The purpose of operational management applied in a company is to achieve a more efficient level of activity. This management has several functions to facilitate this goal. The functions in question include planning, organizing, and supervising business operations for better production results.

Control over the company’s operations also aims to minimize production costs as well as avoid excessive use of resources. In order to achieve this objective, operational management has several functions covering the following areas.

1. Finance

The most important complementary element in operational management is finance. This management must be able to ensure that the company’s finances are used according to plan and do not go off track. The finance must really be used for the production of quality goods and services.

Effective finance can be sure to facilitate the process of creating optimal products and services. Of course, goods and services are aimed at meeting customer needs as a whole.

2. Strategy

The operational management function is used in developing business strategies to optimize company resources, as well as increase competitiveness with other companies. The intended business strategy includes the procurement of raw materials, marketing, financial capability, and optimizing human resources.

3. Operational

This management function is closely related to the company’s operations which include planning, organizing, directing, and controlling all business activities. The main function of operational management is indeed related to all company activities. Where his job is to help convert raw materials and employee services into quality products and services for consumer satisfaction.

4. Product Design

Modern technology makes it easier for sales to be a faster and simpler process. The function of operational management here is to ensure that products are made according to the wants and needs of the market. The market or consumers are of course very concerned about quality. Therefore the resulting product must be ensured durable and quality.

5. Maintain Quality

The quality of the products produced by the company must be ensured by the existing systems in operational management. The management team must control and ensure that goods and services are free from defects. They must also supervise workers in carrying out their duties. If there is a defect in the product produced, the team must immediately act to fix it.

6. Predictions

Prediction is an estimate of future events using software. In operational management, predictions are used to estimate consumer demand for a product. This prediction relates to the number of products needed by consumers for a certain time.

The existence of operational management in a company will help increase productivity in it, but there must be a design and management of activities carried out by the company to run it well which you can learn from the Strategy & Analysis Operational Management book .

Operational Management Function in Business

1. Planning

This stage starts from determining the type of production of goods and services, as well as the right time to market them. This includes planning the resources and facilities used to make a product. The responsibility of the operations manager is in terms of developing programs, policies, as well as procedural needs in achieving business operational goals.

2. Organizing

The number and type of human resources must be determined for the smooth running of all activities. In other words, the operations manager forms an arrangement of workers, whether individuals, groups or departments in an operational system to achieve company goals.

3. Reviewers

The reviewer stage includes all activities in obtaining information about the activities carried out in the company’s operational activities.

4. Supervision

Supervision functions to control all activities with the aim of directing and guaranteeing that all company activities run as planned.

Operations Management Strategy

In studying the operational management strategy, we must know that there is a running system in it, as described in the Distribution Management Operational System book that Sinaumed’s can read below.

The most effective way to develop a strategy is to understand the various resources that the company has. Because strategy is heavily influenced by internal elements of the company, such as company resources in the form of technology and external issues, namely market share.

In fact, many companies develop strategies by combining internal and external factors.

1. Content Strategy

The strategy here is closely related to meeting market needs, as well as taking advantage of various opportunities for a more potential market share. Strategy depends heavily on the company’s plans. Still, in preparing the operational management strategy, there are several important contents.

2. Design the process

In this content there are research, estimation, and development activities. Where all these activities require expertise as well as energy whose results can last a long time.

3. Innovation

Is the process of updating the company’s output in order to compete with the times.

4. Data usage

It is an important analytical activity for proper planning, adjustment, and decision making.

5. Supply chain management

Is the management that regulates the company’s relationship with manufacturers who supply raw materials.

6. Inventory analysis

Is an activity that manages the company’s inventory, and divides it in the ABC analysis. Inventory owned is divided into 3 categories A, B, and C. Category A has the most value and control, while C has the least.

7. Production control

Is an effective and efficient operational management of the process.

8. Collaboration between departments

Based on a good collaboration and communication system, operational management can collaborate effectively with finance, marketing, sales, human resources, and other departments.

9. Managing human resources

Management that regulates the company’s workers, the level of customer satisfaction, as well as quality control.

In fact, this management strategy should include the following:

• The capacity of the company needed to achieve its goals.
• Time and place of facility.
• Technological resources to develop processes and products.
• Establish an ideal relationship between consumers and suppliers.
• The process of introducing new products as well as services.
• The organizational structure as a description of the company has implemented the plan well.

The following are several areas of activity that require operational management expertise in their implementation.

• Factory manager, is an area of ​​expertise in production planning, purchasing and inventory management. This includes control over workers in the operational section and other resources.
• Purchasing director, related to the purchasing function, expertise in reviewing sales, establishing good relationships from suppliers to distributors, and coordinating company operations.
• Quality manager, supervises all quality concepts. Because quality is a shared responsibility.
• Process improvement consultants, activities related to process design as well as consulting on various process improvements.
• Supply chain managers and planners are fully responsible for discussing cooperation between the company and its suppliers and distributors.

Studying operational management is not an easy thing, as we can see in the Airport Operational Management book which makes Soekarno Hatta airport a case study, where with the rapid development of the aviation business negligence often occurs due to a lack of understanding of operational management operations.

Operational Management Conclusion

After understanding the previous discussion, it can be concluded that operational management is an important system in the company. So the effectiveness and efficiency of operational management have a big impact on the company. This management system has a role to make products produced according to predetermined operating standards. The resulting product must also be able to satisfy consumer needs.

Another thing that must be considered in operational management is a transparent and efficient financial recording process. Good financial records make all business plans work optimally. Financial reports will take place optimally because all reports are presented in accordance with existing facts.

A business with good bookkeeping will make it easier to control its finances. Both finances are included in income, as well as expenses. The company’s capital will also be seen whether it is used according to plan or not. Apart from that, the company’s expenses will be controlled, especially in terms of raw material and production costs. To support management, competent technological resources are needed.

Operational management is needed so that the company can develop optimally. Enrichment of the supervisory system for various departments in the business must be carried out by this management system.

Operational management is the application of management science that aims to regulate all company activities so that they run effectively. This management must contain a management system and must be carried out based on its function. Without operational management, it is feared that all supporting elements of the company’s activities cannot run properly.

Book & Article Recommendations Related to Operational Management

Oligopoly Market – Everyone has different needs, so when they want to fulfill those needs, they need to buy them. Before there were buying and selling transactions, fellow humans exchanged the goods they owned or often known as barter. Before fellow human beings barter, it must be in accordance with the agreement of both parties or more so that it is mutually beneficial and both parties are equally happy.

Basically this barter activity continues to experience development, until in the end an exchange of goods becomes a sale and purchase transaction. Currently, buying and selling transactions are often used in the market, so not a few people think that buying and selling transactions are also included in market activities.

Buying and selling transactions carried out by humans in the market are not all the same, so there are lots of traders who aim to meet the needs of humans. The large number of traders raises a competition between producers, so that it often creates unhealthy competition. This unhealthy competition usually only benefits one or a few producers, so that market activities become unbalanced.

Basically, there are several unhealthy or imperfect competitions, one of which is oligopoly. Oligopoly can make trade competition imperfect because prices can be set at will by producers or sellers, especially for producers who already have names or brands that are well known to the public, so that other producers will find it difficult to compete.

So, to find out more about oligopoly, you can listen to this article, Sinaumed’s. So, what are you waiting for, immediately read this article until it’s finished.

Definition of Oligopoly Market

It has become commonplace when you want to know something, you should do it by recognizing its meaning first. As with information about oligopoly, we need to recognize and understand oligopoly through its understanding. In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) oligopoly is a market condition with only a few producers supplying goods, so that they or one of them can influence market prices or an unbalanced market condition because it is influenced by a number of buyers.

Meanwhile, quoted from Investopedia, oligopoly is a market structure in which there is only small capacity or only a handful, but can significantly affect market conditions.

In Law Number 5 of 1999, oligopoly is included in an agreement that is prohibited by the government. This is stated in article 4 which reads “Business actors are prohibited from entering into agreements with other business actors to jointly control the production and or marketing of goods and or services which may result in monopolistic practices and or unfair business competition.

In fact, in the same article and listed in paragraph 2 it is also explained about producers or business actors who are suspected of having entered into oligopoly agreements. The article reads “Business actors should be suspected or considered to be jointly controlling the production and or marketing of goods and or services, if two or three business actors or a group of business actors control more than 75% of the market share or one type of certain goods or services.

The oligopoly market can indeed be regarded as one of the unhealthy or imperfect market activities, but in reality, in this type of market, the competition for the same product between one producer and another is very tight. This can happen because fellow producers mutually maintain product quality so that their name or brand is not inferior to other producers.

Thus, oligopoly can be said to be a form of imperfect or unhealthy trade competition because some sellers or producers already have many buyers. Until now, there has been no definite determination regarding the large number of companies that are members of an oligopoly market.

Oligopoly features

So that it is not so difficult to understand oligopoly, we need to know oligopoly through its characteristics. The following are the characteristics of an oligopoly.

1. Consists of Two or More Companies

Consisting of two or more companies is the first characteristic of oligopoly. However, an oligopoly can only be realized if the number of companies or producers is less than 10%. With these characteristics, imperfect trade competition will arise because products that are best-selling in the market only come from manufacturers or companies that have a “name” or brand that is well known by many people.

Therefore, the state makes a law regarding agreements that may not be carried out in the world market. This is done so that this oligopoly can be avoided, so that economic growth in a market can run well and old or new producers can compete healthily.

2. Products traded are usually homogeneous

The products that are traded or traded are homogeneous which is the second characteristic of oligopoly. In these characteristics, producers usually only produce and sell one product. In other words, one item or product with another product can replace one another, so that it is not too difficult for consumers to get a homogeneous product.

In Indonesia, there are several products that are homogeneous or can be replaced, one of which is cigarettes. Things like this can be seen when there is a type of cigarette that is not selling well in the market, it will be replaced with the same product (cigarettes), but with different variations.

3. Prices between products are almost the same

Relatively the same product prices are the characteristics of the third oligopoly. In general, the prices of goods or services in this oligopoly market do not differ much or can be said to be almost the same. In this case, the meaning of almost the same price is that the price of a product or service sold by one producer to another is not much different. Prices are almost the same because the number of producers is not so much.

In general, if the price of a product from one producer rises, then the product from the other producer will also increase. Therefore, when you look at the price of one type of cigarette with another, the price is not that far away.

4. Requires a Mature Marketing Strategy 

A mature marketing strategy characterizes the fourth oligopoly. In an oligopoly market the competition will be even tighter because there are very few producers who “play” in this market and the products or goods produced are also few. Therefore, producers who have entered the oligopoly market must have a mature marketing strategy in order to be able to compete with other producers.

If producers or companies do not carry out or make careful strategic planning, the company will lose competitiveness with other companies. The wrong strategy can also cause consumers to move to other products, so that goods or services become unsold.

5. A Rule of a Company or Manufacturer may affect Manufacturers 

Other

The existence of influence on other producers caused by the policy of the main producer is a characteristic of an oligopoly. In an oligopoly market, the main producer can be said to be the policy maker. Simply put, if the main producer determines the price of a product, then other producers will follow the price set by the main producer. Not only price, but changes in the function of a product can also affect other manufacturers.

Therefore, in an oligopoly market, “ordinary” producers must have proper preparation to follow changes in a policy originating from the main producers. If “ordinary” producers cannot follow the main producers, they will likely be unable to compete with other companies.

6. New Producers Will Have Difficulty Entering the Market

Producers find it difficult to enter the oligopoly market which is the sixth characteristic of oligopoly. For new producers, it will be difficult to enter the oligopoly market, so that not a few new producers narrow the market, make small profits, or even go bankrupt. Producers who go bankrupt because the products they sell are unable to compete with old producers who already have market prices and whose brands are well known.

The difficulty for new producers to enter the market means that the market can be said to have unhealthy competition. If things like this happen continuously, it will be difficult for the oligopoly market to find new producers.

Types of Oligopoly Market

We also need to know several types of oligopoly. There are several types of oligopoly, including:

1. Pure Oligopoly Market

A pure oligopoly market is a market that sells only one good. Even though there is only one item, the variants of the item are quite a lot. Meanwhile, the price of one item with another is almost the same. In this type of oligopoly market, almost every policy is influenced by the main producer. That is why this type of oligopoly market is called a pure oligopoly market.

2. Differentiated Oligopoly Market

A differentiated oligopoly market is a market that sells only one type. However, the price of one type of goods is not the same as the price of other producers or companies. Simply put, the price from one producer to another will experience differentiation. If this happens, then the oligopoly market will become increasingly unhealthy, because consumers prefer relatively cheap prices, but good quality goods.

3. Non Collusion Oligopoly Market

A non-collusion oligopoly market is a market where if a company wants to play the price of a good or service, it needs to pay attention to the conditions or developments that occur in other companies (competitors). In an oligopoly market, this needs to be done by a company because it aims to make the business being undertaken experience growth and other companies cannot follow the price competition.

4. Collusion Oligopoly Market

An oligopoly market is a market where almost every producer or company cooperates. Usually this cooperation step is carried out when you want to increase the price of a product or service. Things like this will show that the competition from one manufacturer to another is not that far off.

Oligopoly examples

Not only through understanding, types, characteristics, but when we want to explore what oligopoly is, we need to know some examples of oligopoly. Below are some examples of oligopoly.

1. Cigarettes

As we know that in Indonesia the cigarette industry is almost never ending or you could say there will always be consumers. The large number of consumers who smoke, then make cigarette manufacturers or companies compete to sell these products. Within the same brand there are several types of variants. Even though only cigarettes are sold, it turns out that cigarette manufacturers are competing with each other, both in terms of price and the quality of the cigarettes themselves.

2. Aviation Services

For those of you who often go out of town or abroad using airplanes, you must know that there are many names of airplanes. Each aircraft name has its own advantages and disadvantages, so that it can be said that there is already a market share for each. However, if the market share is not maintained properly, the airline may suffer losses or go bankrupt.

3. Selling and buying motorbikes

This increasingly modern and faster era, the use of motorbikes is quite a lot, so that it becomes a target market for motorbike manufacturers. Buying and selling motorbikes is an example of an oligopoly market because there are already various companies selling the same product (motorcycles), but with different brands.

4. Cement

When building a house, we usually need building materials, namely cement. Cement itself can be used to unite building materials, such as adobe, hebel, red brick, and others. The more people who build houses, the more cement will be used. Producers are ready to compete to produce quality cement products at affordable prices.

5. Mobile

The use of mobile phones in this modern era is often used, even almost everyone has a mobile phone . This is because mobile phones can be regarded as one of the needs that must be met because with this device, we will be able to establish communication with people who are far away. Mobile phone products have been sold in the market and the prices vary widely.

6. Telecommunications Operators

Each operator or card provider will have their own strengths and weaknesses, so that each telecommunications operator manufacturer will compete to get a large number of consumers. Therefore, each telecommunications operator manufacturer makes a careful marketing plan, namely affordable prices with stunning quality. With this competition, it can be said that every telecommunications operator already has a marketing strategy and there is a fairly tight competition.

7. Instant noodles

Almost everyone likes these instant noodles, especially for those who are boarding . Instant noodles themselves can be used as a snack when the stomach is hungry or used as a side dish of a dish, such as lunch. In Indonesia, there are quite a number of instant noodle companies, so consumers are often confused about which one to choose. Companies or manufacturers are starting to see this market share starting to increase the advantages of a product in the hope that the product will continue to run.

Conclusion 

Basically, oligopoly is imperfect competition, so it will be difficult for new producers to enter this oligopoly market. However, on the other hand, maintaining a company in an oligopoly market is not easy because it requires careful marketing planning. Therefore, only a few producers are able to survive in the oligopoly market.

Source: From various sources

Author: Restu Nasik Kamaluddin

Oil Producing Regions in Indonesia, from Biggest to Oldest – As a country already famous for its rich natural resources, there are several oil producing regions in Indonesia. Some of these oil-producing areas can be seen from the presence of oil refineries. The oil refinery itself is a place to process petroleum to be converted into fuel oil products.

An oil refinery is basically an industrial facility for processing crude oil. Furthermore, the crude oil will be made into ready-to-use petroleum products or various other types of fuel oil products. Some of the main products that are processed at oil refineries, such as gasoline, diesel fuel, kerosene, naphtha oil, and many more.

Indonesia’s status as one of the countries with the largest oil reserves in the world has made this country have many oil refineries spread across various regions in Indonesia. Until now, there are seven regions known as oil producers in Indonesia, including Cilacap, Balikpapan, Musi, Dumai, Balongan, Cepu.

A. Oil Producing Regions in Indonesia

sinaumedia.com managed to summarize five regions that have long been known as oil producers from Indonesia. The following are the five largest oil-producing regions in Indonesia, namely:

1. Cilacap, Central Java

The first oil producing area is Cilacap. The area or district that is included in the administrative area of ​​Central Java Province has long been known as the largest oil producer in Indonesia. In addition, the Cilacap refinery or often referred to as Refinery Unit IV Cilacap is an oil refinery with the most complete facilities owned by Indonesia.

With a capacity of up to 348,000 per day, the Pertamina Cilacap oil refinery is the largest oil refinery in Southeast Asia. The Cilacap oil refinery itself is basically a merger of two oil refineries in the area. The first oil refinery was built in 1974 with a capacity of only 100,000 barrels of oil per day.

Due to the increasing demand for fuel and lubricating oil, the refinery was rebuilt to undergo a Debottlenecking project to meet demand. After being successfully built, the oil refinery has a capacity of up to 218,000 barrels of oil per day.

It is not surprising that the oil refinery in the largest district in Central Java has a very strategic value. This is because the Cilacap oil refinery has supplied around 34 percent of the national demand for fuel oil (BBM), and nearly 60 percent of it is used to meet the demand for fuel in Java.

Apart from fuel, the Pertamina Cilacap oil refinery also produces asphalt and base oil to meet the needs of infrastructure development in Indonesia. This makes the Cilacap oil refinery the only oil refinery in Indonesia that produces asphalt and base oil.

2. Balikpapan, East Kalimantan

The second oil-producing area in Indonesia is Balikpapan. This area in the province of East Kalimantan has the second largest oil refinery in Indonesia, after the oil refinery in Cilacap, Central Java. Even so, the Balikpapan oil refinery or often referred to as the Balikpapan Refinery Unit V has a production capacity of up to 260,000 barrels of oil per day.

With a production capacity of up to 260,000 barrels of oil per day, currently the Balikpapan oil refinery has been able to meet 26 percent of the Indonesian state’s fuel oil (BBM) needs, especially the domestic demand in the eastern part of Indonesia.

The existence of an oil refinery in Balikpapan itself has long been discovered since the pre-independence era. In 1897, the Dutch East Indies Government named the oil-producing area the Mathilda Well. Then, since 1922, the Dutch East Indies officially established the Balikpapan Oil Refinery and started producing oil.

Since it was first established, the Balikpapan oil refinery has undergone several repairs. This of course continues to be done in order to increase margins and production capacity of oil refineries. Several products from the Balikpapan oil refinery have also been adjusted to the Service Level Agreement (SLA), starting from various types of fuel products such as Premium, Solar, Pertadex, and Pertamax. Not only that, non-fuel products are also in accordance with the SLA, namely Smooth Fluid 05 and LPG.

3. Musi, South Sumatra

The third oil-producing area in Indonesia is the Plaju oil refinery or known as Refinery Unit III Plaju. This oil refinery is located on the banks of the Musi River, Jalan Beringin I, Plaju, Palembang City, South Sumatra. The Plaju oil refinery can be said to be the oldest oil refinery in Indonesia.

The Plaju oil refinery itself has two refinery locations that were established before the Indonesian state became independent. The Plaju oil refinery was first established by Shell from the Netherlands in 1904. Not long ago, in 1926, Stanvac from the United States succeeded in establishing the Gerong oil refinery. Now, the two oil refineries are combined to become the Plaju Refinery which operates under the management of Pertamina.

Currently, the Plaju refinery has a production capacity of up to 127,300 barrels of oil per day. One of the main activities of this oil refinery is processing crude oil. In addition, the Plaju Refinery is also capable of processing intermediate products into finished products. Several finished products that were successfully produced, including Premium Kerosene, Diesel, Fuel Oil, LPG, Avtur, Pertalite, Pertamax, to Pertamax Racing.

4. Dumai, Riau

The fourth oil-producing area in Indonesia is the City of Dumai. Dumai City is one of the areas included in the Riau Province. This oil refinery located in the Dumai area is known as the Putri Tujuh Refinery or often referred to as the Sungai Pakning Oil Refinery. The third largest oil refinery in Indonesia is under the management of Pertamina Refinery Unit II Dumai.

The Seven oil refinery is located on Jalan Raya Refinery Princess Seven, Tanjung Palas, East Dumai, Dumai City, Riau. This oil refinery, which has been operating since 1971, has a production capacity of up to 127,000 barrels of oil per day. Production results from the Seven Oil Refinery itself will be distributed to various regions throughout Indonesia, even to foreign countries.

Its production capacity includes fuel and non-fuel. It is not surprising that the Tujuh Oil Refinery has fuel products, such as Aviation Turbine Fuel (Avtur), Diesel Oil, Fuel Oil, Diesel Oil and Kerosene. Meanwhile, the non-fuel products produced by the Seven Oil Refinery include three types, starting from Solvent, Green Coke, to LPG.

Since being operated for the first time in 1971, the Tujuh oil refinery, Dumai has made a real contribution to the development and progress of regions in Indonesia, especially the city of Dumai and its surroundings. The Tujuh oil refinery also makes a large contribution to meeting national scale fuel needs.

5. Balongan, West Java

The fifth oil-producing area in Indonesia is Balongan, West Java. The Balongan oil refinery itself is the fifth largest oil refinery in Indonesia. The Balongan oil refinery, also known as Refinery Unit VI Balongan, is located in Indramayu, West Java. However, this oil refinery operates in the Balongan, Mundu and Salam Darma areas.

This oil refinery which has been operating since 1994 has main business activities for processing crude oil. With a production capacity of up to 123,000 barrels of oil per day. The Balong Oil Refinery is capable of converting crude oil into products such as Fuel Oil, Non-Fuel Oil, and Petrochemicals. Some of its products are Premium, Pertamax, Pertamax Plus, Solar, Pertamina DEX, Kerosene or kerosene, LPG, and Propylene.

The existence of the Balong oil refinery itself has a very important role for Pertamina’s business continuity. Not only that, this oil refinery is also one of the most important oil refineries for the country. This is because the development of the Balongan Oil Refinery has innovative business potential, starting from the application of new technology, new product development, and application of international standards.

6. Kasim Oil Refinery, Papua

The sixth oil-producing area in Indonesia is located at the eastern end of Indonesia, namely the Kasim Oil Refinery. The Kasim oil refinery itself is located in Malabam Village, Seget District, Sorong Regency, Papua Province. The location of this oil refinery can be said to be quite strategic. This is because it is adjacent to Petrochina’s Kasim Marine Terminal (KMT).

The Kasim oil refinery actually started operating in July 1997. Since then, this oil refinery has been under the management of the Pertamina Refinery Unit (RU) VII. The product capacity of the Kasim refinery itself is capable of reaching 10,000 barrels of oil per day. However, this oil refinery is designed to process Crude or crude oil from the Walio and Salawati areas. The Kasim oil refinery has been able to meet the national fuel demand by up to 15 percent, especially the needs of the Maluku and Papua regions themselves.

7. Cepu, Central Java

The seventh oil-producing area in Indonesia is Cepu. Cepu Regency is an area that is included in the administrative area of ​​Central Java. East Java is the largest oil producer in Indonesia. The Cepu oil refinery itself is known as the Cepu Block, which includes Blora Regencies, Central Java and Tuban Regencies as well as Bojonegoro Regencies, East Java.

Based on data from SKK Migas in 2019, the Cepu oil refinery is capable of producing up to 220,000 barrels of oil per day. However, the Cepu oil refinery is managed by Pertamina and ExxonMobil. With this achievement, it is possible that after the operation of the oil refinery in the Sukowati area, Tuban, this area’s oil refinery will become the largest oil producing area in Indonesia.

8. Brandan Base, North Sumatra

The last oil-producing area in Indonesia is Pangkalan Brandan, North Sumatra. The Pangkalan Brandan oil refinery itself is located in the Langkat Regency, North Sumatra. This oil refinery, which was built for the first time in 1892, caught fire in 1947 during a military aggression from the Netherlands.

However, the Pangkalan Brandan oil refinery has been closed since early 2007. This is due to a shortage of supplies of crude oil and gas at that point. However, recently there was news that the Pangkalan Brandan Oil Refinery would be active again.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Offside is – Offside is a situation when the position of a football player who is being fed then exceeds the position of his opponent, while there are no other opposing players besides the goalkeeper.

Offside itself adopts a military term, namely “off the strength of your side” which means, is a player who is released from duty or is released from the game. Offside in soccer also refers to the sport of rugby. The concept is almost the same, which prohibits a player from just standing still waiting for the bait in front of the enemy’s goal.

Offside also sometimes becomes sensitive in football. Because, sometimes players who are active will then attack and score goals, but are trapped and offside. Because of that, a special rule was made regarding offside in the FIFA Law of the Game. Here’s a more complete explanation.

Definition of Offsides

Offside is one of the rules of football, which is codified in an 11th Law of the Laws of the Game. If translated into Indonesian it means out of position. FIFA law also states that a player is out of the area of ​​play or offside, if he is touched by the ball or received a pass by a team-mate, if this player is ahead of the last player of the opposing team and when this player is closer to the opponent’s goal line. after goalkeeper.

Basically, soccer players are not allowed to be passive in an opponent’s field area while attacking, although they are allowed to play passively in other field areas to defend. The blue player who is in the far left position is then in an offside position because he precedes the opposing team’s defenders, although offside also does not apply if he does not receive a pass or is hit by the ball.

Being in an offside position is not a violation. If an offside occurs, the referee stops the match and gives an indirect free kick to the opposing team who is offside.

However, violations can occur in certain cases, for example, if a goal is scored after an offside event is then annulled if the referee first declares it offside. This then sparked a debate about the objectivity of the assistant referee when a player’s position is equal to or almost beyond the defender’s opponent but becomes an offside position in the view of the referee.

The use of technology with an offside assessment is also still being debated among football observers. even so, the offside strategy is still implemented as a way to trap opposing players in the defensive area.

Rules Regarding Offsides

The most widely agreed offside regulation in football was then established by the English Football Association (FA) in 1863. Since that year, the FA has banned attacking players from being in front of the ball when the round skin is kicked forward.

The offside rule itself was formed, in part because football is considered to resemble a game of rugby, with a similar tactic where players are allowed to use their hands to then control the ball in some circumstances.

These attacking players are also considered to have an undue advantage if they are in an offside position. Along with the development of the sport of football, the offside regulations are then continuously updated.

The following are the offside rules in football which have been stipulated in the Laws of the Game by the International Football Association Board (IFAB). A soccer player is also declared to be in an offside position as follows.

• Any part of the body, head or feet of the player is in a position ahead of the defender from the opponent.
• S Any part of a player’s body, head or feet is in the opponent’s area (where the boundaries are the lines in the center of the court).
• The hands and arms of all players, including the goalkeeper, are not taken into account. The limit of the part of the body that is included in the offside calculation is above the arm parallel to the bottom of the armpit.

An Offside offense then does not apply if:

• This player is in his own area.
• Players are level with the second last player of the opposing team.
• Players are level with the last two players of the opposing team.
• A player, who is in an offside position, then does not move at all (does not respond to the arrival of the ball). This means that the game continues when a teammate responds to the arrival of the ball, who is not in an offside position.

The Offside Rule of ‘Three Defenders’

There were many different opinions about the offside rule until finally the University of Cambridge tried to unify these various theories into one standard rule formulation. This standard rule was also often accepted and became the guideline of its time.

The rules themselves are quite unique and are also known as the “three players back” rule. In this rule an attacker is then declared offside even though in his front position there are still three opposing defenders, including the goalkeeper.

You can imagine how often there was an offside when this rule was applied. Just one step already offside. A slight forward hand is called offside.

The Offside Rule of ‘Two Defenders’

When FIFA was founded in 1904 to be precise, all football regulations including offside began to be considered more seriously. The Scottish Football Association then proposed replacing the “three at the back” rule with only two players.

The concept itself is the same, the difference being hit by an offside is when two defenders are standing between someone and the enemy’s goal. Usually, one defender and one goalkeeper. This rule change was implemented in 1925, and resulted in a more attractive game. Because the chances of offside occurring are getting smaller, the goals that are created are also becoming more and more entertaining for the spectators.

As a result of the offside change, the pattern and style of play also changed. Each coach then had to rack his brains to beat offside. That is why in the past the 2-3-5 tactic was often used by placing only two defenders, one of whom was a sweeper or libero.

The Offside Rule of ‘One Defender’

In 1990, the offside rule was revised again and applied to the 1990 World Cup in Italy. An attacker will be said to be in an offside position, if at the time he receives the bait only one opponent’s defender is left in front of him.

In normal situations, this defender is the goalkeeper, as well as players dealing with players who are defenders. In 2003, FIFA then made an additional article regarding offside which is more flexible when someone is in an offside position so he is not necessarily declared as offside if he is not actively involved in the game. The easy thing is that his body doesn’t try to chase the ball that is directed at him.

History of the Offside Rule

Football is a team game, consisting of 2 teams facing each other. Each of these squads then consists of 11 players. Football itself is generally played in two halves with a duration of 2 x 45 minutes, as well as a 15-minute break between the two halves. Football itself has gone through many developments, both in terms of rules and how to play it.

The same source said that football was first discovered in China, during the Han Dynasty. At that time around the 2nd or 3rd century AD, the ball used was made of animal skin and rolled up to a round shape. Even though this game was invented centuries ago, the official governing body for football was only formed for the first time on October 26, 1863.

England at that time took the initiative to form an official football body, under the name English Football Association (FA). This organization itself finally gave birth to modern football rules a few months later, on December 8, 1863 to be precise. One of them is the offside rule.

Then, ideas also developed that formed the container for world football. At the initiative of Guerin (a French football figure), the International Football Federation or FIFA was formed on May 21, 1904. After several decades, in 1930 to be precise, FIFA finally participated in organizing soccer competitions at the world level. This championship is agreed to be called the World Cup or World Cup, and is held regularly every 4 years. This first World Cup then took place in Montevideo, Uruguay.

Basic Football Techniques

Not only in terms of regulations, the technique of playing soccer also continues to experience changes from time to time. Starting from the basic technique to developing into a technique with a higher level and highlighting the abilities of each individual.

Meanwhile, referring to the Module book published by the Ministry of Education and Culture, there are at least three basic techniques in soccer that need to be mastered by players of this sport. Here are some of them.

Ball Kicking Technique

Kicking the ball is a basic technique that must be mastered in a soccer game. This technique itself is done by swinging the leg and applied to the ball, with the power of the impetus that has been targeted beforehand. The technique of kicking the ball can also be used for various purposes.

For example, scoring a shot at the opponent’s goal, then feeding the ball to a teammate, and dribbling or dribbling. Foot contact with the ball when kicking yourself is not only in one place. There are several parts of the leg that can be used to score kicks. For example, only on the inside of the leg, the outside of the leg, and on the instep area.

Ball Control Techniques

Controlling is a technique or ability to stop the ball coming from a teammate’s pass. Controlling the ball can also be done by using the inside of the foot, the sole of the foot or the sole of the shoe and the outside of the foot.

As for controlling the ball using the chest or head is an additional technique that emerged along with the development of modern football. Controlling the ball using the chest or head is usually done when the ball that comes later is above the stomach.

Technique of Dribbling the Ball (Dribbling)

The third basic technique in soccer that is important to learn is dribbling or dribbling. This technique is also done by kicking the ball slowly in a high frequency while running.

The aim of dribbling is generally done to avoid the opponent’s obstacles and to open up empty space in certain areas of the field. Like the basic technique of kicking, dribbling can also be done with 3 feet. Dribbling the ball can also be done with the inside of the foot, the instep and the outside of the foot.

Related Books

1. Football Devotee

Football is not only a matter of winning or losing, but also of power and asylum. This book writes straightforwardly. This book examines football in the broadest sense as a cultural space, namely the arena of discourse battles where all people form identities and compete for assets.

In it, the practice of various power relations that are driven by three major powers: Gold, Glory, Goal (3G). Apart from giving fanatical and ecstasy effects to fans, football also gives promises of power and asylum to those who want it. Because football is important as a means of production, it is worth shouting: Football fans around the world, unite!

2. Soccer Coaching: Theory and Practice

Playing soccer apart from requiring excellent physical condition, every player also needs to be supported by good ball control skills in order to play a sport which is still the most popular sport in the world.

Skills in mastering the ball in question are how each player can kick (pass) the ball, control (controlling) the ball, dribbling (dribbling) the ball, shooting (shooting) the ball, and heading (heading) the ball with the correct technique. If this has been mastered correctly then implementing tactics and strategies will undoubtedly run more easily.

In this book, various information will be explained about the history of the game of football, the infrastructure and facilities for playing it, the basic techniques of players and how the drill-drill model trains these basic techniques, tactics and strategies, as well as the rules of the game of football in accordance with the FIFA Law of the Game 2017. In this edition It also includes the basic playing techniques for a goalkeeper as well as the training drills he needs.

This book is equipped with photos and pictures that clarify the description/discussion of the material discussed, so that readers from beginner to advanced levels can easily put it into practice.

3. Sharp Tactics of Stalking Football Stars

As a football fan, the chance to spend some time in England is a great opportunity to experience the football culture there. Seeing the possibility of being able to meet and get a memento from a soccer star that can usually only be seen on a television screen, the adventure of peeking at famous soccer players in Europe began. A moment captured by a camera or a signature from the idol is the fun part of this adventure.

This book, Tactics for Stalking Football Stars, thoroughly examines how to meet soccer players in the UK and several places in Europe. In addition, this book also shares information about places that can be visited to meet the gridiron star, ways to get photos and autographs, as well as things that need to be known in hunting football players.

This book is written based on the author’s personal experience. Through this book, readers can be helped when they go looking for their idol soccer players if they have the opportunity to visit England or other cities in Europe and can experience unforgettable experiences.

This is an overview of offside that Sinaumed’s needs to understand in soccer. 

Number of Ministers in Indonesia and Their Names – The Advanced Indonesia Cabinet is a government cabinet chaired by President Joko Widodo and Vice President Ma’ruf Amin. This cabinet includes 4 coordinating ministers and 30 field ministers appointed on October 23, 2019 based on the Decree of the President of the Republic of Indonesia Number 113/P of 2019 regarding the formation of state ministries and the appointment of state ministers of the advanced Indonesian Cabinet for the 2019-2004 period.

On December 23, 2020, President Joko Widodo and vice president Ma’ruf Amin replaced a number of ministers by introducing six new figures in the cabinet based on the Presidential Decree of the Republic of Indonesia Number 113/P of 2020 regarding the filling and replacement of several state ministers in the Indonesian Cabinet. forward period 2019-2024.

Then on April 28, 2021 President Joko Widodo appointed 2 Cabinet Ministers based on the Decree of the President of the Republic of Indonesia Number 72/P of 2021 concerning the formation and change of Ministries and the appointment of several state ministers of the advanced Indonesian Cabinet for the 2019-2024 period. Through the latest changes at this time, the head of state simultaneously introduced the Ministry of Education, Culture, Research and Technology and the Ministry of Investment.

Number of Ministers in Indonesia and Their Names (2022)

So, who are the newest ministers in Indonesia? Here are some names of ministers in Indonesia, including:

1. Coordinating Minister

The Indonesian Coordinating Minister for the 2019 – 2024 period is divided into 4 (four) minister categories, including:

a. Coordinating Minister for Politics, Law and Security

Prof. Dr. H. Mohammad Mahfud Mahmudin, SH, SU, MIP or familiarly called Mohammad Mahfud Md was born on May 13, 1957. His figure is an Indonesian politician, academic, and judge. Currently serving as the coordinating minister for politics, law and security of the Republic of Indonesia in the Advanced Indonesian Cabinet for the 2019 to 2024 period during the reign of Joko Widodo with KH Ma’ruf Amin.

b. Coordinating Minister for Economic Affairs

Airlangga Hartarto was a man born on October 1, 1962 who served as the Coordinating Minister for the Economy in the Advanced Indonesia cabinet chaired by President Joko Widodo with Vice President KH Ma’ruf Amin. He is also the chairman of the Golkar Party (Golkar). Previously, Airlangga Hartarto served as Minister of Industry, then was replaced by Saleh Husin during the reshuffle of President Joko Widodo’s working cabinet and Jusuf Kalla.

c. Coordinating Minister for Human Development and Culture

Prof. Dr. Muhadjir Effendy, MAP is a man born on July 29, 195 who served as Coordinating Minister for Human Development and Culture during the Advanced Indonesia Cabinet which was established on October 23, 2019. Previously, he served as Minister of Education and Culture of the Republic of Indonesia during the Working Cabinet which was led by President Joko Widodo and Vice President Jusuf kalla on 27 July 2016 replacing Anies Baswedan.

d. Coordinating Minister for Maritime Affairs and Investment

The man who was born on September 28, 1947, is a businessman, retired four-star Army general, and politician named Luhut Binsar Pandjaitan, has served as Coordinating Minister for Maritime Affairs and Investment since October 2019. Prior to serving as Coordinating Minister for Maritime Affairs and Investment, he served as Coordinating Minister for Maritime Affairs and Investment Polhukam from August 2015 to July 2016, and served as President Joko Widodo’s chief of staff. In addition, Luhut Panjaitan also served as Minister of Trade and Industry in President Abdurrahman Wahid’s cabinet and Indonesian Ambassador to Singapore from 1999 to 2000.

2. Minister of Fields

Meanwhile, the Indonesian Minister of Sector for the 2019-2024 period is divided into 30 ministers, including:

a. Minister of State Secretary

The man who was born on February 13, 1962 named Prof. Dr. Drs. Pratikno, M.Soc.Sc was Minister of State Secretary during the working cabinet of President Joko Widodo and Vice President Jusuf kalla for the period 27 October 2014 to 23 October 2019. Then he returned to become Minister of State Secretary in the advanced Indonesian Cabinet of President Joko Widodo’s government with deputy president Ma’ruf Amin for the 2019-2024 period.

b. Minister of Home Affairs

The man who was born on October 26, 1964 named Prof. Drs. H. Muhammad Tito Karnavian, MA, Ph.D is an Indonesian police figure and politician who served as Minister of Home Affairs for Indonesia on 23 October 2019 during the reigns of Joko Widodo and Ma’ruf Amin.

c. Minister of Foreign Affairs

The woman who was born on November 27, 1962 named Dra. Retno Lestari Priansari Marsudi, LL.M is the first female foreign minister in Indonesia to serve from 27 October 2014 to 22 October 2019 in Joko Widodo’s working cabinet. After that, on October 23 2019, Retno Lestari was re-appointed by President Joko Widodo as Minister of Foreign Affairs.

d. Ministry of defence

Lieutenant General TNI (Ret.) H. Prabowo Subianto Djojohadikusumo was born on October 17, 1951. He was a businessman, politician, and high-ranking Indonesian military officer.

Prabowo Subianto studied in the military for 28 years before starting to get involved in the world of business and politics. After that, on October 23 2018, Prabowo Subianto was appointed as Minister of Defense of the Republic of Indonesia for the 2019 to 2024 period in the advanced Indonesian cabinet.

e. Minister of Religion

Yaqut Cholil Qoumas or familiarly called Gus Yaqut born on January 4, 1975 is an Indonesian politician who served as Minister of Religion in the Advanced Indonesia cabinet. Previously, Gus Yaqut was a member of the People’s Representative Council (DPR) from the National Awakening Party (PKB).

f. Minister of Law and Human Rights (HAM)

Yasonna Hamonangan Laoly was born on May 27, 1953, is an Indonesian politician who served as the Indonesian Minister of Law and Human Rights (HAM) on October 27, 2014 until his resignation after being elected as a member of the Indonesian Parliament on October 1, 2019. However, President Joko Widodo again appointed Yasonna to the position of Minister of Law and Human Rights in the advanced Indonesian cabinet during the reigns of Joko Widodo and Ma’ruf Amin.

g. Minister of Finance

Sri Mulyani Indrawati was born in Lampung, August 26, 1962. She is the first woman and Indonesian to serve as Managing Director of the World Bank. Until finally he was entrusted with being the Minister of Finance during the reign of Joko Widodo.

h. Minister of Education, Culture, Research and Technology of Indonesia

Nadiem Anwar Makarim, BA, MBA was born on July 4, 1984, is an Indonesian businessman who currently serves as the Indonesian Minister of Education, Culture, Research and Technology in the Advanced Indonesia cabinet during the reigns of Joko Widodo and KH Ma’ruf Amin.

i. Minister of Health

Ir. Budi Gunadi Sadikin was born on May 6, 1964, is a corporate professional from Indonesia. He served as Minister of Health for Indonesia in the Indonesia Onward cabinet replacing Terawan Agus Putranto. As well as being the second health minister after Mananti Sitompul with a health background.

j. Minister of Social Affairs

Dr. HC Ir. Tri Rismaharini, MT or usually called Risma was born on November 20, 1961, was the minister of Social Affairs for the Republic of Indonesia during the Indonesia Onward cabinet, serving from December 23, 2020. Before serving as minister, Risma had served as Mayor of Surabaya on September 28, 2010 to September 28 2015 and 17 February 2016 to 23 December 2020.

k. Minister of Labor

Dr. Hj. Ida Fauziyah, M.Si born on July 17, 1969 is an Indonesian politician who served as Minister of Manpower in the Advanced Indonesia cabinet for the 2019-2024 period. Before becoming a minister, he had once advanced to become a candidate for deputy governor of Central Java accompanying Sudirman Said in the 2018 gubernatorial election. In addition, he is also the general chairman of the NU fatayat central board.

l. Industry Minister

Dr. Agus gumiwang Kartasasmita, M.Sc. born on January 3 1969 was the minister of industry in the advanced Indonesian Cabinet for the period 2019 to 2024. Before serving as minister of trade, he served as Minister of Social Affairs replacing Idrus Marham on August 28 2018 to October 20 2019. As well as a member of the People’s Representative Council (DPR) period 2009-2014.

m. Minister of Trade

Muhammad Lutfi born on August 16, 1969 is an Indonesian businessman and state official. In September 2020 he was assigned as Indonesian Ambassador to the United States. Lutfi served as trade minister twice, namely at the end of President Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono’s leadership in the United Indonesia Cabinet 2 from 14 February to 20 October 2014 and in the second term President Joko Widodo led in the advanced Indonesian Cabinet on 23 December 2020 replacing Agus suparmanto.

n. Minister of Energy and Mineral Resources

Ir. Arifin Tasrif was born on June 19, 1953, was Indonesia’s minister of energy and mineral resources in the Indonesia Onward cabinet since October 23, 2019. Previously, he had served as the main director of PT Pupuk Indonesia.

o. Minister of Public Works and Public Housing

Ir. Mochamad Basoeki Hadimoeljono, is the minister of public works and public housing who was born on November 5, 1954 in the Indonesia Onward cabinet chaired by Joko Widodo and Ma’ruf Amin on October 13, 2019. Previously, he had also been the minister of public works and public housing for the period 2014-2019.

p.s. Minister of Transportation

Budi Karya Sumadi is the minister of transportation of the Republic of Indonesia in the 2019 to 2024 Indonesian cabinet who was born on December 18, 1956. Previously held a similar position in the working cabinet on July 27 2016 replacing Ignasius Jonan.

q. Minister of Communication and Information Technology

The man who was born on September 10, 1956 was named Johnny Gerard Plate, was a Minister of Communication and Information for Indonesia in the Indonesia Onward Cabinet. He is a graduate of Atma Jaya Catholic University and started a business on plantation equipment starting in 1980.

r. Minister of Agriculture

Dr. H. Syahrul Yasin Limpo, Sh. M.Sc was born on March 16 1995, is the 28th Indonesian Minister of Agriculture who served from 23 October 2019 in the Advanced Indonesia cabinet for the 2019-2024 period. He is an Indonesian politician who served as Governor of South Sulawesi from 8 April 2008 to 8 April 2018. Syahrul Yasin won the 2007 and 2013 South Sulawesi Governor elections with his running mate, Agus Arifin.

s. Minister of Environment and Forestry

A woman named Siti Nurbaya Bakar is the Minister of Environment and Forestry in the working cabinet for the 2014-2019 period. After that, on October 23 2019, he was re-elected as Minister of Environment and Forestry for the 2019-2024 period.

t. Minister of Maritime Affairs and Fisheries

Ir. Sakti Wahyu Trenggono, MM is a politician and entrepreneur in Indonesia. He was the treasurer of the National Mandate Party from 2009 to 2013. He also served as treasurer for Joko Widodo’s winning team since taking part in the city of Solo, until finally advancing to the city of Jakarta and becoming president at the national level. After that, on December 23 2020 Sakti Wahyu Trenggono served as Minister of Maritime Affairs and Fisheries.

u. Minister of Villages, Development of Disadvantaged Regions and Transmigration

The man born on July 14, 1962 named Abdul Halim Iskandar, was a minister of Villages, Development of Disadvantaged Regions and Transmigration in the Advanced Indonesia cabinet during the reign of Joko Widodo and Ma’ruf Amin for the 2019-2024 period. Since 1999, he started his political career as chairman of the Jombang National Awakening Party (PKB) DPC.

Those are some of the ministers in Indonesia. Hope it is useful

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Of course, many of us already know that nouns are nouns, if they are interpreted according to their short vocabulary. But if explained, then a noun is a word that has a function to express places, objects, animals, and also people. These nouns are one of the eight parts of speech which are important for us to learn. Almost everyone knows that there are many students who experience difficulties in learning English, one of which is the problem of recognizing whether a vocab in English is a noun. For example, color types are included in nouns. No wonder there are many of us who are still confused about this difference.

Therefore, by studying this discussion more optimally, it is hoped that it will make it easier for us to understand what a noun is. If it is not well recognized, then of course it will be difficult to change it into other forms such as noun phrases or others.

What are Nouns?

In English, nouns are parts of speech that are quite important to learn. Because, noun itself is used to name all objects and also concepts that exist in this world, be it physical things or abstract things. In addition, nouns can also be interpreted as words that are used to name and refer to people, things, places, and ideas. In other words, this one word refers to physical objects and abstract concepts. Nouns can be interpreted for example with words like those below.

– Physical objects: pool, house, glass, floor, cup, table
– Abstract concepts: idea, time, age, difficulty, opinion

From the examples mentioned above, we can conclude that nouns do not only refer to physical objects, but also abstract concepts that exist in this world.

Functions of Nouns in Sentences

In one sentence, there are many noun functions that we should understand. Because, when you continue learning English, of course you will experience confusion. So, to prevent this, you can work around this by knowing the further discussion of the material, so it’s not just nouns.

The function of the first noun in a sentence can be the subject of a verb which means the subject of the verb. For example, “Justin has studied Economics for more than 10 years, meaning that “Justin has studied Economics for more than 10 years”. Then for the second function is as a subject or object complement. For the example itself, namely “I am an Engineer, She is a Doctor, He is a Broker” in which the words are positioned as subject complements. Meanwhile for complement objects, for example, “I call him the best daddy, He called me little princess, She called me Prince, and so on.

Nouns are not just nouns, because nouns themselves also function as direct and indirect objects. An example of a direct object is like I can hold all my feelings, which means I can hold all my feelings. Meanwhile, for the indirect object example, My mom teaches me how to cook well. That is, my mother taught me how to cook well.

 

Various Nouns

In order to be more fluent in understanding noun material, it would be better if we also have to know what are the divisions of the noun itself. The following is a division of noun types that you need to understand, starting from common nouns, abstract, proper nouns, collective nouns, and concrete nouns. The following is a full explanation:

1. Countable and Uncountable Nouns

When interpreted, countable is something that we can count, while uncountable is something that cannot be counted. For countable nouns and also uncountable nouns, both have a discussion of regular and irregular. To understand this division, you are required to memorize. Why? This is because there are several types of nouns that fall into the irregular category, which are the same as in the discussion of irregular verbs. You can’t just add “s” to the noun vocabulary in question. However, there are also some nouns that must be added “es” and adapted to the basic form of Vocab.

For further discussion, here are some examples:

“How many shoes does your sister have right now?” That is, how many shoes does your sister have now? Here, the form of the noun being described is an irregular countable noun.

2. Proper and Common Nouns

Proper is the classification of nouns that are discussed specifically. Where the noun used usually uses a capital letter at the beginning of the word. For example, for nouns Zara, Gucci, Vincci, and so on. Meanwhile, common nouns are nouns that are discussed in general, such as cities, shops, and so on.

3. Abstract and Concrete Nouns

For discussion concrete nouns are nouns that cannot be observed by sensing such as feeling, love, thought, and so on. The opposite of this, for concrete nouns is something that can be seen physically with flour, book, pencil, and so on.

4. Collective Nouns

For discussions such as collective noun which is a name of a group or group.

Noun Phrases and Compound Nouns

Apparently, nouns can form other phrases known as noun phrases. This phrase is the result of a combination of nouns with modifier forms such as determiners and so on. The form of this determiner modifier is for example (a, an, this, that, her, such, each, every, and so on). Meanwhile, there are also combinations of nouns with adverbs (too, very, so, and so on). Then lastly, noun phrases also have combinations of nouns and adjectives such as intelligent, lovely, stubborn, and so on.

Forms of examples that can be given in the form of Noun Phrase are such as that man, this dog, beautiful woman, such a worse day, and so on. Nouns can also be combined with other parts of speech such as prepositional phrases or adjectives. The result of this combination can actually form a new meaning or what is usually known as a compound noun.

The example of a combination of nouns with nouns is toothpaste. Then the combination of noun and verb is like a rainbow. While the combination of nouns with prepositional phrases is like mother-in-law, sister-in-law, or brother-in-law. The last is a combination of adjectives and nouns, for example cupboard and blackboard.

Noun Substitute

The next discussion for nouns is related to gerunds, noun clauses, infinitives, and others. The following is a full explanation.

1. Gerunds

This form is a simple form of the verb added with the ending ing. However, you have to be careful with other types of verb ing which have other meanings as well. Examples of sentences for gerunds are, for example, I love talking, my brother loves swimming in the pool, my mom is scared of swimming, and finally my father hates reading so much.

2. Noun Clauses

Noun clause is a dependent clause that is used as a noun. For example, like I know what he meant, I wonder if he will be okay or not.

In explanations in English, whether it’s from vocabulary or communication in English, then you have to learn it from the basics. One of them is that you have to understand a word that is useful for declaring an object, place, and also a person.

 

Functions of English Nouns

Noun itself has several important functions. Where these functions include direct and indirect objects, subject of verbs, and so on. For more complete, below is the summary.

1. Direct and Indirect Objects

The direct object usually has the goal of answering a question, in the form of whom and what after the action verb in a transitive sentence. In contrast to the indirect object which functions to answer a question from the word for what or to whom. Therefore, it is important to understand that nouns that act as objects can be direct objects and indirect objects. When a noun becomes an object, it will generally be accompanied by pronouns such as determiners (a, an, the) and others.

Example of Direct Objects:

a. Marchell plays piano in his room. (Marchell plays the piano in his room.)
b. Velia married a Korean man. (Velia married a Korean man.)

Example of Indirect Objects:

a. Siti bought his dad a house. (Siti bought her father a house)
b. Nura cooks spaghetti for Bambang. (Nura cooks spaghetti for Bambang)

2. Subject of Verb

Most people think that nouns only function as objects. However, in reality, that’s not always the case. Where a noun can also function as a subject. In a sentence, a noun or noun will function as a subject when it is in front of the verb. Nouns that function as subjects can be accompanied by determiners (an, the), but they can also be accompanied by determiners. This depends on the subject used. Maybe this sounds a little confusing to you, but don’t worry, because below we will discuss an example.

Examples of Subject of Verbs

a. Riki is swimming. (Riki is swimming)
b. A car was stolen yesterday. (A car was stolen yesterday)
c. His restaurant serves tea. (The restaurant serves tea)

3. Subject and Object Complement

The next function of nouns in English is as subject and object complement. The subject complement is a complement that refers to the subject in a sentence. The complement will usually be in the form of a noun or noun that is placed in the word before the linking verb. Meanwhile, object complement is almost the same as subject complement. If the subject complement explains the subject, the object complement will function to explain the direct object. The direct object will usually be in the form of a noun or noun.

Examples of Subject Complements:

a. Damara became a pianist after his sister passed. (Damar became a pianist after his sister died)
b. Her uncle was a famous softball player. (His uncle was a famous softball player)
c. I am the director of this company. (I am the director of this company)

Example of an object complement:

a. Joko brought Kenanga a cake. (Joko brings Kenanga cake)
b. Jono cooks a noodle for Dani. (Jono cooks noodles for Dani)
c. Lala gives his son a car. (Lala gives her son a car)

4. Object of Preposition

One of the functions of a noun is to state a place. Generally, we need a preposition to describe a place. These prepositions are prepositions such as on, in, at. The following is an example of an object of preposition.

Examples of Object of Prepositions:

a. My dog ​​loves to sleep in a large box. (My dog ​​likes to sleep in big boxes)
b. I learned Korean proficiency. (I am learning Korean proficiently)
c. The library is on the three floors. (The library is on the third floor)

This is an explanation of what a noun is in English. Hopefully the explanation above can add to your insight about English material.

Normal Distribution – In a probability distribution theory, the normal distribution occupies an important position in various statistical analyses. This type of distribution is also often used as material for calculating various phenomena in everyday life.

For example in calculating measurement errors , height, blood pressure, error calculations, to the translation of IQ scores with normal distribution cases as the main reference. Check out a more complete explanation regarding the Definition, Parameters, Characteristics of the Normal Distribution below:

Definition of Normal Distribution

Normal distribution as a type of distribution of continuous random variables. In the normal distribution itself there is a bell-shaped curve or graph. The normal distribution can also work as a Gaussian distribution. The normal distribution equation includes a density function. The normal distribution with this probability function will then show the variable or spread of the distribution. This function will also be proven by a symmetrical graph or bell curve.

While the distribution markers are even, this curve will also peak in the middle to be sloping on both sides with an equal value equation. This distribution theory is also known as the Gaussian distribution or the Gaussian distribution. The term refers to Carl Friedrich Gauss or a German mathematician who developed a distribution theory with a two-parameter exponential function in the period 1794-1809.

Even so, the initial theory was the forerunner that began to be developed by Abraham de Moivre in 1733. After knowing the parameters of the normal distribution theory as its main characteristics, it can be concluded that this theory also has an important position in the statistical concept of probability. Its application is also considered important because it can increase the objectivity of the assessment. This will also be very helpful in placing the most appropriate members in a particular group, for example when grouping employees or evaluating student scores.

Within the same criterion it also avoids the occurrence of biased or ordinary judgments in only one category. With a centered and symmetrical distribution on the average value of all data in a population, one-sided or unbalanced judgments can then be avoided. Also helps in determining the degree of normality and central tendency. In statistics, especially probability statistics, the normality of a data is an important thing that cannot be ignored. Through the theory applied by the Gauss distribution, the level of data normality or central tendency can also be determined more easily.

Normal Distribution Parameters

After knowing the main characteristics and parameters in the normal distribution theory, it can be concluded that this theory has an important position in the statistical concept of probability. Its application is also considered important for several reasons, ranging from increasing the objectivity of assessments, helping to place the most appropriate members for a particular group, evaluating student grades or grouping employees according to the same criteria to avoid bias or skewed assessments in only one category. .

With a symmetrical distribution centered on the average value of all data in a population, one-sided or unbalanced judgments cannot be avoided. The normal distribution will also help determine the degree of normality with a central tendency. In statistics, especially probability statistics, the normality of a data is an important thing that cannot be ignored.

Through the theory applied by the Gaussian distribution, the central tendency or level of normality of the data can also be determined more easily. Thus information regarding the normal distribution as well as the parameters and characteristics that complement its application. For those of you who are studying probability statistics or are looking for supporting theories in calculating data, then the information above can be used as a reference.

As in other distribution theories in probability statistics, the shape of the normal distribution probability value curve is determined by a number of parameters. For this distribution, there are two types of parameters which are then used as a reference, namely the mean or an average value with a standard deviation or standard deviation, along with the explanation:

• The average value is generally used as a distribution center or other spread of values. This value will then determine the location of the peak point in a bell curve, while the other values ​​are intentionally spread out to follow the average.
• The standard deviation as a calculation of variability functions as a determinant of the width of a normal distribution curve. This standard can also calculate how far the tendency of the data will widen from the average value as the center point. The smaller the standard deviation value, the curve will also have a more pointed shape. In addition, the standard deviation also serves to describe the general difference or distance between the mean and other observed data.
• Population parameters versus sample estimates. The mean and standard deviation as parameter values ​​apply to the entire population. In a normal distribution, the statistician also denotes the parameters by using the Greek symbols μ (mu) for the population mean and σ (sigma) for the population standard deviation. However, population parameters are generally unknown because it is generally not possible to measure the entire population. On a random sample to calculate the estimate of this parameter can also be used. The statistician who represents the sample estimate of this parameter also uses x̅ for the sample mean and s for the sample standard deviation.

Characteristics of the Normal Distribution

The Importance of the Normal Distribution in terms of statistics. Some statistical hypothesis tests also assume that the data is deliberately made to follow a normal distribution. But in a parametric and nonparametric test, there are more than normally distributed data.

Both linear and nonlinear regression also assume that the residuals follow a normal distribution. The central limit theorem also states that as the sample size increases, the sampling distribution of the mean follows a normal distribution in the distribution on which the original variable is not normal. When showing a data distribution value, the normal distribution also has a number of main characteristics, including the following:

• Distribution theory with the same mean, median, and mode. Because of this distribution is often also referred to as unimodal. This distribution curve can also be symmetrical with a bell shape or bell curve.
• The peak point of the curve is at the average value. This value itself is right in the middle of the curve, while in distribution data it is located around a straight line drawn down from the midpoint.
• The mean or average value with this standard deviation value will then determine the location and shape of the distribution.
• The total area under the normal curve is 1, which is ½ on the right and ½ on the left. This is also true for all continuous probability distributions.
• In the distribution curve, it can also be concluded that half of the population data will then have a value that is less than the average number, while some will have a much larger value.
• Each of the tails curves on either side of this then extends ad infinitum. In some cases of calculating the distribution, the tail of the curve may even intersect the horizontal axis.

Empirical Rules for the Normal Distribution

For example, in a normal distribution, 68% of observations are within +/- 1 standard deviations from the mean, 95% are within +/- 2 standard deviations and 99.7% are within +/- 3 standard deviations from the mean. This property is also part of the Empirical Rule, which describes the percentage of data that falls within a given number of standard deviations from the mean for a bell-shaped curve.

Standard Normal Distribution and Standard Score

This distribution is also known as the Z distribution. Values ​​in the standard normal distribution are also known as the standard score or Z score. The standard score represents the number of standard deviations at the bottom or top of or below the mean decrease of a particular observation. For example, a standard score of 1.5 indicates that the observation is 1.5 standard deviations above the mean. On the other hand, a negative score represents a value below the average with an average Z score of 0.

Standardization: How to Calculate Z Values

This standardized scale also allows you to compare previous observations that seem difficult to make. This process is also known as standardization, and allows you to compare observations and calculate probabilities across different populations.

In standardizing your data you also need to convert raw measurements into Z-scores. To calculate the standard observation score, start from the raw size, subtract the mean, and then divide by the standard deviation. Mathematically, the formula for this process is something like this: Z=μ−x¯σ X and represents the raw value of the desired measurement.

$\mu$ and sigma also represent parameters for the population from which the observations are taken. After the data is standardized, the data in the standard normal distribution is also used. Using this method, standardization will allow you to compare different types of observations based on each observation being in its own distribution.

Standard Score for Comparing Male and Female Height

If we want to compare the height of male and female students. Specifically, let’s compare the heights. Imagine a man with an average height of 180 cm and a woman 160 cm. When comparing the raw scores, it is easy to see that the men are taller than the women.

However, let’s compare their standard scores. To find out about the properties of height distribution in the height of women and men. Assume the height follows a normal distribution with the following parameter values:

Human height $ \ mu $ = 180 $ \ sigma $ = 30 Female height $ \ mu $ = 160 $ ​​\ sigma $ = 10

Now we will calculate the Z score:

Men’s Z score = (170-175)/30 = -0.16666666666666666
Women’s Z score = (165-160)/10 = 0.5
Z-score for men (-0.1667), which means that the male sample has a smaller height than the average male . On the other hand, women have a positive Z-score (0.5). This means that the sample height of the women is higher than the average because their Z values ​​are described in the standard normal distribution.

Finding the Area Under the Normal Distribution Curve

The normal distribution is a probability distribution. As with probability distributions, the proportion of area under the curve between two points on a probability distribution plot indicates the probability that a value will fall in that interval. To learn more about this property, first understand what is meant by a Probability Distribution.

Usually, we will use statistical software to find the area under the curve. However, when working with the normal distribution and converting values ​​to standard scores, you can calculate areas and look up Z-scores in a Standard Normal Distribution Table. Because on an infinite number of different normal distributions, a publisher cannot then print a table for each distribution. However, we can convert values ​​from any normal distribution into Z-scores, then use that table of standard scores to calculate probabilities.

p_bottom -0.4986501019683699
p_top 0.2475074624530771
Area Under Curve = p_above – p_bottom = 0.746157564421447
Normal Distribution (mean,std): 0 1
Integration of the curve between -3 and 0.66666666666666446 –> 0.746574571

Book Recommendations

1. Introduction to Research Statistics

The work of Nila Kesumawati, Dr. Nila Kesumawati, M.Si The presentation of concepts and examples of basic statistical calculations in this book is presented in a simple and organized manner that makes it easier for readers to understand how to analyze data from educational research results. The existence of a concept map at the beginning of each chapter helps the reader in mapping out the divisions, differences as well as the linkages between the material in an outline.

This book is very good as teaching material in basic statistics courses and even research statistics because the material in this book is arranged hierarchically and adapted to the syllabus in tertiary institutions. This book can also help students in preparing their final assignments even for researchers who conduct qualitative research.

2. Statistics for Modern Economics and Finance 3rd Edition

This is the work of Book 1 by Suharyadi, Purwanto SK Along with economic and financial developments, statistics are used to see the business cycle and the influence of economic policies on the country’s economy. Statistics for Modern Economics and Finance 3rd Edition is specially designed for modern economics and finance by applying statistical theory to actual cases.

In this edition, there are several updates to examples and cases that are more contextual. This book is divided into 2 books (volumes). Book 1 emphasizes descriptive statistics which consists of 10 chapters and is planned to be completed in 1 semester for Statistics 1 course. Book 2 emphasizes inferential statistics which also consists of 10 chapters and can be completed in 1 semester for Statistics 2 course.

3. Statistical Functions for Analyzing Data

Not only contains statistical functions, but also all supporting functions that allow us to work in the field of statistics. Includes data preparation and data processing before calculations are performed using statistical functions. You also need to know that if you work with Excel 2010, it turns out that many Excel function names have been changed; adapted to make the name consistent with its use. Statistical functions are one of the groups that have received the most improvements.

Obviously this is very convenient for Excel users because the names that used to feel awkward and difficult to recognize and memorize are now names that are more consistent with their meaning. BINOM.DIST Example for the Binomial Distribution; BINOM.INV for Inverse (reverse value) of Binomial. Likewise GAMMA.DIST for Gamma Distribution and GAMMA.INV for GAMMA inverse values. Then the VAR.P and VAR.S functions to calculate the variance of the entire population and the variance of a number of samples. And many more positive changes to Excel function names.

Nonfiction Stories? – Have you ever wanted to check before buying a book what kind of book it is or just look at the title and author’s name? You buy books because the author of the book is an idol so you keep following his works?

Because you really need a book, maybe you don’t realize that the book you bought is a non-fiction book. Usually these non-fiction story books are used as supporting references for making scientific works, theses, papers and so on.

Definition of nonfiction stories

Nonfiction story is an essay or writing that is informative, the author has responsibility for the truth of the events, people, and/or information conveyed.

Therefore, when assembling a non-fiction story content framework, rigorous research is needed based on information, accurate data and the truth or facts of an event or problem regarding the matter to be written.

This needs to be considered because this story is usually used as a source or reference material for information for its readers. The language used in the story must also be logical and acceptable to the reader’s reasoning, the language used is formal, not informal.

Sinaumed’s can learn step by step how to write nonfiction stories in the book Become a Nonfiction Writer? It’s easy!!! It contains various writing tips, and many more that can help improve your writing skills.

Non-fiction stories are very different from fictional stories in that the writer does not need accuracy regarding the content in them. The difference in nonfiction stories can be seen for the first time from the title of the book. Want to know more about the characteristics of nonfiction stories?

Features of nonfiction stories

Here are some of the characteristics of non-fiction stories that you pay attention to when you want to identify them:

1. Formal or Standard Language

As I said above, the first feature that is easily identifiable from the category of writing non-fiction books lies in the delivery using formal language, which can be seen from the title of the book, not using slang. The formal language, in this case, does not use slang, alay or contemporary language that is currently booming , does not use various types of writing.

In terms of writing according to good and correct language, sometimes the contents of nonfiction books are serious. Although there are some non-fiction books, for example motivational books and reference books, some are written in lighter language. Even though using light language, writing still uses appropriate language, this method is allowed.

In the process of writing non-fiction story books, writers usually follow the rules of each publisher because each publisher has various writing SOPs. There are book publishers that accept books that use standard language and ideas that have never been published before or are similar to one of the books that have already been launched.

Then, there are publishers who accept non-fiction books that use language that fits the author’s style of language. However, in terms of delivery, basically you have to use good and correct puebi. So back again, it depends on each publisher’s policy.

2. Denotative language

What is denotative language? According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) related to denotation. It means a word that is based on a straightforward designation of something outside language or that is based on certain conventions and is objective in nature. Both have similarities, denotative is the meaning with an objective meaning and in accordance with the original. The meaning of what is is not accompanied by feelings and thoughts without creating a certain sense of value.

What is written is useful for conveying complete information, to the point and firmly. The writers use denotative language with the aim of the writer providing information to the reader without being artificial. Information that is not convoluted and only half of it. Not only providing information, but also providing stimulants and inspiration to readers.

3. The contents are related to facts/actuals

The contents of the storybook are factual and factual. Facts are in accordance with data obtained from the field or pre-existing research. The contents of the book submitted are factual so that readers can benefit from the information provided.

There are many categories of non-fiction books, including teaching materials, motivational books and reference books. Of these several types of books, all of them have different characteristics, and have one thing in common, namely imaginative books without sources.

4. His Writing Is Popular Scientific

Non-fiction storybook writing is said to be in a popular scientific writing style or adapted to the Puebi format. In other words, writing is not always stiff and that’s all. It is said that scientific writing is popular because it is presented in language appropriate to the market and the data taken is based on studies, field research surveys , bibliography and refers to the same references or sources.

The source referred to later is not directly rewritten just like that. However, still going through the process of selecting diction or words that are familiar are quite easy to understand and convey again using the language style that the author uses. The usual way is to combine old ideas from reference sources and then mix and match with the ideas we have.

5. The contents are taken from existing or inventions

Why are non-fiction books written by the author until they are published for readers? Of course it has to refine or improve ideas from previous authors/reviewed manuscripts.

Therefore, writers who write themes, content, story ideas that are similar or simply the same in different languages ​​are often rejected by major publishers. Large publishers have criteria such as the author submitting manuscripts that contain elements of interesting new ideas and are not exactly the same as existing manuscripts.

So, don’t give manuscripts to publishers carelessly so that your writings can be printed by big publishers

You can find a work of non-fiction and can immediately identify the elements mentioned above in the work.

Learn these elements and their application to improve your writing skills through the book 1 Hour Advanced Writing: A Guide to Learning to Write Fiction & Nonfiction by Annisa Mardatillah.

Forms of Nonfiction Writing

The following are forms of non-fiction essays that we often encounter, my friends:

1. Curriculum vitae / Biography

A biography of a person, is writing that contains the journey of a person’s life either written by himself or written by someone else. One example is the book Soekarno: A Biography which tells the story of a hero of independence in Indonesia.

2. Essay

Essay is an essay or writing that discusses a theme from the author’s personal point of view. As one example that Sinaumed’s can read, namely FS Soliloquy: Collection of Essays .

3. Scientific Writing

KTI is the work obtained from writing activities by applying scientific conventions, for example, theses, theses, papers, journals, research articles and working papers.

Sinaumed’s can learn the techniques and concepts of compiling structured documents in making good scientific writing through Microsoft Office Word through the book Writing Scientific Papers Using Microsoft Office Word 2003 (revised).

4. Documentary Records

Historical stories are writings that tell about the past of an object. One example is the book Innocent (The Innocent Man) which is an adaptation of a documentary that is on Netflix.

Types of Nonfiction Stories

Based on the examples mentioned, the types of nonfiction stories are divided into two, namely pure nonfiction and creative nonfiction. The explanation is below:

1. Pure non-fiction

The writing is arranged or made with a truly original depiction. The author when developing pure non-fiction stories, there is evidence in the form of original data that can be accounted for. Examples of scientific writing such as theses, journals, papers, someone’s curriculum vitae

2. Creative non-fiction

Creative non-fiction also includes evidence in the form of original data which is then developed into an imaginative essay. An example is writing in literary journalism such as articles and news.

The structure of nonfiction is not the same as fiction. Offensive nonfiction structures:

• Orientation , is the part that contains the introduction of the characters involved in the story and an explanation of the text of the story.
• The series of events in sequence, contains the sequence of events that occur in the story from the beginning to the end of the problem which usually uses forward flow.
• Reorientation , is the ending of a story that contains the conclusion of a story and a cover that contains suggestions and moral messages that can be taken from the positive side of non-fiction story texts

Next, we will discuss the elements in non-fiction stories, namely:

Elements of Non Fiction Books

Below are elements of non-fiction stories that must be present in a story

1. Title

The book title is the name used for a book or chapter which can briefly imply the contents of the book, usually placed on the cover of the book. The title of a non-fiction book uses standard language.

2. Author Name

There is an author’s name in a nonfiction story that conveys his composition

3. Publisher Name

Publishers are companies/agencies that print books, starting from editing, layout, cover design and so on until the book is printed and ready for distribution.

4. Page Thickness / number of chapters

Number of pages and number of chapters discussed in the book.

5. Contents of the book

Content is the topic to be discussed

6. Cover

Closing is the conclusion of the book which is the last statement from the author of the book, sometimes there are also suggestions from the author.

For those of you who are trying to write non-fiction works, you need to know the steps so you don’t miss anything.

How to Make Nonfiction Story Composition

Steps to make a non-fiction essay, let’s continue to follow it until the end

1. Looking for Creative Ideas

If you want to find ideas for writing non-fiction books, you can make scribbles in notes related to what areas you master or have fun doing most while browsing too. it is suitable for any age

2. Gather references

After finding an idea, the next activity is collecting data related to the contents of the story that will be poured. It is really necessary to do research, make observations from books, newspapers and journals that can be used as a reference for our writing.

3. Create a concept to be written

After the data is collected, make a concept for your book, starting from compiling chapters, compiling sub-chapters or making questions that complement the contents of the writing. Decide on the theme of what non-fiction book will be made, for example history, motivation or scientific essays

4. Language style

The concept has been made, then use the writing language style with the theme and type written. It’s very important to pay attention to writing in a language style that is adapted to pubic language because in this section your work will be assessed by prospective publishers who will distribute your work properly or not. After passing from the publisher, readers will judge your work, whether it is informative, the language is easy to understand or too difficult to understand.

5. Supporting Data

Some nonfiction books usually require supporting data. Supporting data can be in the form of incident examples, application examples, photos, drawings, and so on.

6. Enter the parts of the book completely

Don’t forget to write down the table of contents, list of figures, list of tables, introduction, contents, bibliography, index, and our profile as authors in the book. Along with a list of pictures and a list that is included in the contents of the book, if there are scientific terms in the essay, make an index to make it easier for the reader to know what the terms you use mean. All completeness of the manuscript aims to make it easier for readers to understand the contents of our book.

7. Choosing the Right Title

The title is always the first thing seen before the reader decides or is interested in reading it when in the library and buys a book. Choose a title and diction that represents the contents of the manuscript, is eye-catching , invites the curiosity of potential readers, for example: Teras Philosophy .

8. Double-checking the writing

After the process of writing a non-fiction book is complete, it is best if the last process needed to be confident in yourself is to re-read the manuscript that was made, check again whether there is still missing data or a series of words that have the potential to confuse the reader, must be deleted and replaced with the word friendly .

9. Submitting to the Publisher

Now, after the manuscript has gone through the self-editing stages, you are sure of everything, the last step you take is to send your work to the publisher and don’t forget to check again before sending to make sure all the details are complete.

We can send manuscripts to major publishers for publication, offer manuscript agents, or publish them indie. Choose a publisher that has the same vision and mission as our manuscript so that the chances of it being published are greater.

Examples of Nonfiction Books

If you need a reference for writing, first read story books that are considered non-fiction, stay tuned until the end because I’ll tell you examples .

1. Examples of Non-Fiction Books on Education

School textbooks are books that have a function to assist students in learning to become good citizens. Through the materials contained in the Pancasila and Citizenship Education book, students are expected to become the next generation educated, nurtured, and directed to be able to think, behave, and act that shows high concern and respect for their nation.

In addition, the next generation can place the interests of the nation and state above self and group interests. Pancasila and Citizenship Education can deliver the next generation capable of facing future challenges. Armed with the Pancasila philosophy, students are able to keep up with the changes and developments of the times, but still maintain the character of the Indonesian nation.

2. Examples of Non-Fiction Stories about Sociology

This book contains Soekarno’s original thoughts on various matters, especially concerning ideology, nationalism and independence, which took place throughout 1928–1940 and were published in various newspapers, especially Suluh Indonesia Muda and Pikiran Rakyat.

In a way, it was the thoughts in this book that became the guideline for Soekarno’s struggle in determining the future of the Indonesian nation towards independence and unity.

3. Examples of Non-Fiction Books for Children

4. Examples of short short non-fiction stories

The book is a short short non-fiction story of the contents of the book

That was the explanation about the nonfiction story. How, do you understand what is meant by non-fiction stories and what are the types? So now you can start looking for non-fiction stories to read, then you can also write them if you want.

Also know about:

• Nonfiction Books
• Definition of Fictional Stories
• Meaning of Pantun
• Definition of Poetry

Non-locomotor movement – In everyday life, of course, humans are always on the move. In every movement, of course, muscles are needed to help our body move according to our wishes. The movements that we do also vary, starting from just moving our head, hands, feet, or just turning our bodies.

In addition, when we exercise also requires a lot of movement. Movement in sports is also not only when we walk, run, or physical activity that makes us move places. The movement that is done during exercise can be when we are still in place, for example, like when doing floor exercises.

The movements that are performed during floor exercises usually use movements that make us always stay where we are. This movement is usually referred to as non-locomotor motion. All the sports activities that we did at that time used all parts of the body but did not make our bodies move.

On this occasion, Sinaumedia will discuss what non-locomotor movements are. To find out more about the meaning, types, and benefits of non-locomotor motion, let’s look at the following reviews!

Definition of Non Locomotor Movement

Non-locomotor movements are considered stability movements. The meaning of this movement is the movement of a person without moving positions or permanently in a stable position. Non-locomotor movements are movements that are carried out without changing position, that is, only acting in the same position.

The position in the locomotor movement is trying to maintain body balance so that it is permanently stable and does not fall. The reason is, the main purpose of doing non-locomotor movements is to train the balance of the human senses so that they don’t fall easily, and survive even in an imperfect position.

Non-locomotor movement is one of the three basic motor skills of a child. The three basic movements include spontaneous movements, non-spontaneous movements, and manipulative movements.

Spontaneous locomotor skills are usually used to move the body from one place to another or to lift the body such as when jumping. Non-locomotor abilities, on the other hand, are associated with activities such as pushing, pulling, lifting, lowering, twisting and shaking. Manipulative skills, on the other hand, relate to movements involving the hands and feet, such as throwing.

Non-locomotor movements develop from infancy through childhood. One month old baby can lift his head and chase something. After two months, you can hold your head up for short periods of time while sitting. Children aged 3 and 4 can paddle and ride tricycles. Children between the ages of 7 and 8 can learn to pedal a two-wheeled bicycle.

Non-locomotor abilities cannot simply be possessed by children. One must have the urge to stimulate non-locomotor movements for better optimization. The early childhood education curriculum is usually included as a school lesson.

The stimulation is usually packaged into a fun activity and is carried out sequentially with other basic movements. For example, stretch before starting a game of running and jumping.

Basic Non-Locomotor Movements

There are several types of non-locomotor movements that you can do while exercising. The following are types of non-locomotor movements.

1. Head Shake

Head shaking is moving the head left and right. This movement is usually done during a warm-up session before doing other strenuous sports. This movement only makes our heads move, but our bodies remain in the original position we stood.

2. Look down

You can do non-locomotor movements by looking down. Looking down means you have to lean your head downwards. This also includes non-locomotor movements because only the head moves.

3. Turn your head

Turning is similar to shaking your head, but only moving in one direction, not as many times as shaking your head. You can do this by looking to the right or to the left.

4. Swinging

Quoting from KBBI, swinging means moving like a swing. Well, it’s not uncommon to do swinging movements, such as swinging your arms to stretch or warm up before training. If you warm up before exercising, a lot of non-exercise will do.

5. Rotating

Twisting means that you can move your body by turning it the other way. For example, you can rotate your arms, waist, ankles, to your body. However, it still doesn’t change position.

6. Bending

Bending is a downward movement by making the body position 90 degrees and looking down. In some countries, there is a tradition of bowing and greeting others. Well, this bending motion does not cause body displacement. Therefore, this movement is called non-locomotor motion.

7. Bending

Bending is moving by folding body parts. This movement is also widely used when exercising. In fact, you also use this movement for daily activities. This movement allows you to move your hips, knees and several other joints without changing your body position. You can do bending movements by bending your wrists, bending your knees, bending your back, bending downwards, or doing a squatting motion that bends your knees and back.

8. Twisting the Body

Other non-locomotor movements include twisting movements or known as waxing movements. These movements can be done by rotating half of the body, but the position of the feet does not change. You can move your hips and head to rotate your body parts. Later, the movement system in humans, namely the limbs from the waist to the head will point to the side.

Benefits of Non Locomotor Movement

Standing, swaying, and bending the limbs, including non-locomotor movements. Stretching or stretching also includes non-locomotor sports. Stretching is an important activity before you start exercising. Not only for athletes, but also for people who repeat movements. The way to train non-locomotor movements is to teach stretching before playing. Some of the non-locomotor movements are:

• Muscle preparation. Stretching prepares the muscles for activity and then helps the body relax.
• Avoid injury. Improve the stretching exercises that were done before then you will be able to prevent injuries during practice.
• Promote blood circulation. Stretching exercises that involve non-locomotor movements have health benefits including better blood circulation and flexibility.
• Strong and flexible muscles. Regular non-locomotor movements will train joints and muscles to become stronger and more flexible

Non-locomotor movement is one of the skills that needs to be taught to children for better physical development in the future. Familiarizing children with exercise makes their bodies more ready for activities.

You, thus the article regarding non-locomotor movements. Of course you often do this movement in your daily life even though you don’t realize it. After reading this article, of course you know that moving without changing your body position from one place to another is non-locomotor motion.

Nisab is – Hello Sinaumed’s friends , you must have known about the two types of zakat, namely zakat fitrah and zakat mal. Both must be carried out by all Muslims and given to mustahiq zakat.

Unlike the zakat fitrah which is paid before the id prayer or during the month of Ramadan, zakat mal can be done at any time if the requirements are met.

One of the pillars of Islam that must be lived by all Muslims is paying zakat. Paying zakat from assets owned must be paid if it meets the existing criteria. One of the obligatory conditions for issuing or paying zakat is when a person has reached the nisab of zakat assets.

As Sinaumed’s already knows, the obligation to pay zakat has been spoken of by the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam in a hadith from Ibn ‘Abbas radhiyallahu ‘anhu which reads:

“Bring them to testify that there is no god who has the right to be worshiped other than Allah and I am the Messenger of Allah. If they comply with that, inform them that Allah has made it obligatory for them to pray five times a day and night.

If they comply, inform them that Allah has made it obligatory for them to pay zakat obligatory from their assets taken from the rich among them and distributed to the poor among them. ” (HR. Bukhari No. 1395 & HR. Muslim No. 19)

The hadith above informs that zakat is one of the acts of worship that must be fulfilled by all Muslims who meet certain conditions, then it is distributed to groups of recipients of zakat or what is commonly called mustahiq zakat according to what Allah has determined.

From the explanation above, in zakat there is a term that meets the requirements called nisab. What is nisab and what are the requirements? And, what is the nisab of zakat in accordance with each type of zakat that exists? Come on, study the discussion on the meaning of nisab, which sinaumedia has summarized from several sources, below.

What is Nisab?

Nisab is a measure or lowest limit that has been patented according to syar’i to be used as a guide when choosing one’s obligations in issuing zakat. Or briefly Nisab is the minimum limit of a person’s wealth that is required to pay zakat.

In other words, when someone has assets and after calculating his wealth has reached nisab or more, then he is obliged to pay zakat as Allah says in one of the verses of the Al-Quran as follows:

“And they ask how much they make. Say (Muhammad):

“That’s more than necessary.” This is how Allah interprets His verses for you to meditate on.” (QS. Al Baqarah: 219)

Zakat nisab assets can vary depending on the type of zakat. Zakat assets can be in the form of trading products, agricultural products, marine products, mining products, livestock products, found assets, as well as gold and silver. All of them have different nisab and cannot be generalized.

 

Terms of Calculating Nisab

1. Has exceeded basic needs

Nisab must be calculated outside of basic needs. If the assets exceed the basic needs and will fulfill the nisab, then the assets must be tithed. A Muslim who is able to meet his daily needs and live a decent life is the minimum measure of the nisab of zakat.

2. Haul or one year period

Assets that have been deposited and have reached a period of one year should be calculated as nisab and paid as zakat. Haul criteria can vary, depending on the type of property that must be owned.

However, it is often done in one year, namely the Hijri year. Assets that do not reach haul are not classified as obligatory for zakat, as explained by the Prophet Muhammad, “And there is no zakat on assets until they reach haul.”

According to Abu Hanifah, the basic calculation is to get the nishab at the beginning and end of the year, so that gaps that occur during the year have no effect. In fact, if you have 200 dirhams, in a year it will be reduced until only 1 dirham remains or before you had 20 goats.

Then in a year only one less, but at the end of the year he has 200 dirhams, which means another 40 goats, so in both cases he has to pay zakat.

However, if the nisab is sold during the course of the year or replaced with other goods, the calculation of the year for reducing the zakat obligation is interrupted and the calculation for the new year must begin.

This requirement does not apply to agricultural and fruit zakat, as the obligation decreases with each harvest. Allah SWT. said: “And use your rights (zakat) on the day of collection (harvest).” (Al-An’am: 141)

Al-‘Abdari said, “Zakat property is divided into two:

some physical development, such as grains and fruits. Property like this must be zakat when it exists. And, there are also construction tools, such as dirhams, dinars, merchandise and livestock.

This class of assets must be calculated for one year, so that when the nishab is completed but the year has not ended there is no obligation to pay zakat. This opinion is supported by legal experts.”

How to Calculate Zakat of Assets Based on Nisab

Before determining how much assets must be spent when paying zakat mal/zakat assets, it should be noted that each class of assets has a different nisab.

1. Nisab Zakat of Gold and Silver Assets

Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alayhi wa sallam said about the nisab of zakat gold:

“Nothing is required of you (i.e. gold) until you have 20 dinars. If you have 20 dinars and have passed one haul, you have ½ dinar zakat, the rest is calculated according to that and there is no zakat on assets except after one haul (one hijriyah year) (HR Abu Dawud, HR. Tirmidhi).

Therefore, the gold zakat nishab is 20 dinars. Where 1 dinar equals 4.25 grams of gold. So, 20 dinars is equivalent to 85 grams of pure gold (24 carat). From this nisab or limit, zakat must be withdrawn from gold securities by 2.5%.

As for silver items, the nisab is 200 dirhams or the equivalent of 595 grams of pure silver. If you have reached the nisab, this person can get zakat up to 2.5% of the amount you have.

Sample case:

A Muslim has 90 grams of pure gold that has been stored for one haul. The person is then obliged to pay zakat with the calculation of 2.5% x 90 grams = 2.25 grams or silver equivalent to the weight of gold.

2. Income Zakat Nisab

The nisab for zakat income or the nisab for zakat money is when a Muslim’s income reaches the equivalent of 85 grams of pure gold per year. Income zakat that must be paid under the MUI Fatwa policy is 2.5% of monthly income.

Sample case:

How much zakat is 10 million?

How to calculate the correct zakat mal or income zakat is not difficult. If you have an income of 10 million per month, you can calculate the amount of zakat that you need to pay yourself.

Income zakat is a type of zakat maal that must be paid upon arrival at Nisab. The nisab is equivalent to the price of 85 grams of gold or 595 grams of silver. If calculated by measuring rice, it is equivalent to the price of 653 kg of grain.

Provisions regarding the obligation of zakat on wages and income were stipulated at the First International Zakat Conference in Kuwait, 29 Rajab 1404 H/1984 M and at the meeting of the MUI Fatwa Board in Padang Panjang in January 2009.

In addition, the Indonesian government has also stipulated in Law no. 23 of 2011 concerning Management of Zakat Article 4 paragraph 2. Fatwa of the Indonesian Ulema Council (MUI) No. 3 of 2003 stipulates that the nisab for income zakat is calculated based on the price of gold.

In addition, Ministerial Regulation (PMA) no. 52 of 2014, Ministerial Regulation No. 31 of 2019 Second Amendment and Regulation of the Minister of Religion (PMA) No. 52 of 2014 confirms the wages generated by a profession.

The first thing to do when calculating zakat income is to find out the current price of gold in the Indonesian market. Prices can be checked on the official website such as Antam.

3. Livestock Zakat Nisab

Two conditions that must be met to determine the zakat of animals on livestock are:

1. If you want to breed, take the milk and oil. In other words, livestock must be given zakat, not livestock used for plowing and watering the fields, carrying luggage or similar tasks. This type of pet is not obligatory zakat.

2. Owned pets are livestock that are allowed to be grazed in the pasture for one year. Permitted pasture means pasture that grows naturally by Allah’s will, not by human effort.

The nisab set for each type of camel is 5 heads. The livestock has a nisab limit of 30 heads. While the nisab of goats is 40 heads.

Nisab for poultry (chickens, ducks, birds, etc.) and fishing does not apply based on the number (head) as is the case for cows and goats. However, it is calculated based on the size of the business.

The nisab for poultry and fish is equivalent to 20 dinars (1 dinar = 4.25 grams of pure gold) or 85 grams of gold. That is, if someone raises poultry or fish and at the end of the year (closed) has wealth in the form of working capital and profits greater than or equal to 85 grams of pure gold, then he is obliged to bear an

4. Nisab Zakat Agricultural Products

Agricultural products that can be granted zakat are plants that meet basic human needs, can be preserved for a long time and are not easily destroyed. The nisab of agricultural products has been identified in the words of the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam which reads:

“There is no zakat for plants under five wasaq.” (HR. Bukhari No. 1405 & HR. Muslim No. 979)

Nisab for agricultural products is 5 wasaq or the equivalent of 750 kg. If the agricultural produce is in the form of staple foods, such as rice, corn, wheat, dates, etc., then the nisab is 750 kg of the agricultural produce.

But if agricultural products are not the main food, such as fruits, vegetables, leaves, flowers, etc., then the nisab is calculated as the nishab price of the food most commonly found in that region (in our country). = rice).

The zakat rate for crops if it is irrigated with rainwater, rivers/rivers/lakes is 10%, if it is irrigated by watering/irrigation (there is an additional fee) then the zakat level is 5%.

From this regulation it can be understood that for plants that are watered the zakat is 5%. That is, the remaining 5% is allocated for irrigation costs. Imam Az Zarqani stated that if the agricultural land is irrigated with rainwater (rivers) and irrigation water (irrigation) with a ratio of 50/50 then the zakat rate is 7.5% (3/4 of 1/10).

In the current farming system, the costs are not only water but also other costs such as fertilizers, pesticides, etc. So, for the convenience of calculating zakat, the cost of fertilizers, pesticides, etc. taken from the harvest, then the rest (if it is in the nishab) gets 10% or 5% zakat (depending on the irrigation system).

5. Nisab Zakat of Commercial Assets

The nishab of 20 dinars (equivalent to 85 grams of pure gold) is 20 dinars (equivalent to 85 grams of pure gold).

This means that if a business entity at the end of the year (close the books) has assets (working capital and profits) greater than or equal to 85 grams of gold (if the price of gold per gram is IDR 533,000, – then 85 grams of gold is worth IDR 45,305,000) , then he is obliged to pay zakat 2.5%.

In a syirkah business entity (partnership), if all members of the syirkah are Muslim, zakat will be issued before being distributed to the syirkah. However, if there are non-Muslim syirkah members, the zakat is only issued by Muslim syirkah members (if the number is more than the nishab).

6. Nisab Zakat Found Assets

There are no nisab and shipping requirements for zakat on found items or assets. The zakat rate is set at 20 ri from the treasure found. As the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said:

“Mining goods (ma’din) are goods that are not given compensation if someone dies while digging them, and assets (rikaz) must be distributed 1/5 (20%).” (Narrated by Bukhari No. 1499)

7. Nisab Zakat Company Assets

The nisab and corporate zakat levels are the same as the required commercial zakat, which is 85 grams of gold. The zakat rate is 2.5% of the obligatory zakat assets owned by the company for a period of one year.

The calculation of zakat or commercial assets owned by business entities cannot be separated from one or more of the following three forms:

• Wealth in kind.
• Cash/bank.
• accounts receivable

So, what is meant by company assets that must be zakat are the three forms of assets minus the company’s obligations, such as debts that must be paid (due) and taxes.

Nisab Calculation Example 

Example of calculating zakat on gold, silver and savings assets:

A person has assets after one year as follows:

• Savings, deposits, bonds IDR 100,000,000
• Cash (excluding basic needs) IDR 5,000,000
• Gold jewelery (any form) 150 gram
• Debt maturing IDR 5,000,000

Gold jewelry that is always worn daily or at any time does not have to be zakat, unless the amount exceeds the capacity of the jewelry that is eligible for zakat. If someone is eligible to wear a maximum of 50 grams of jewelry, then what must be zakat is only jewelry that can exceed 50 grams, namely 100 grams.

Closing

Thus a review of nisab zakat. For Sinaumed’s who want to know more about other nisab zakat, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

In the world of skin care and beauty, there are always innovative new active ingredients that are trending
and proven to be effective. Niacinamide is one such example. Over the past two
years, facial skin care products containing this ingredient have become a favorite of many people.

Niacinamide itself is basically a form of Vitamin B3 with various benefits for the body, such as the brain,
kidneys and skin. Our bodies cannot produce niacinamide, so we must get it from food or skin
care products.

In conclusion, niacinamide is an ingredient that can help make your appearance even more glow up in
2023. How did it happen? Check out the full explanation below.

What is Niacinamide?

Actually niacinamide is a derivative of Vitamin B3 or niacin which has many benefits. In the
world of dermatology, for example, a substance known as nicotinamide is often used to brighten the skin,
treat acne, remove acne scars, and control rosacea symptoms.

Uniquely, even though it has a name similar to niacin (Vitamin B3), niacinamide actually has a different
function and structure. This substance is usually produced by the body when the intake of
Vitamin B3 or the amino acid tryptophan is excessive in the body. So niacinamide is not just
Vitamin B3.

Niacinamide works by inhibiting the release of chemicals that can cause inflammatory reactions in the body.
In addition, this substance can also slow down the process of transferring the coloring substance
into the skin cells so that the skin becomes brighter.

Furthermore, niacinamide also functions to help form proteins in the skin and trap moisture in skin cells, so
that the protective layer remains strong and the skin becomes healthier.

In fact, you can get niacinamide and niacin from several foods such as eggs, meat, milk and processed
products, green vegetables and nuts. Apart from that, these two compounds are also found in
Vitamin B6, Vitamin B9, and Vitamin B12.

However, the Vitamin B3 that you consume can leave the body because it dissolves easily in water.
This means, you can be deficient in vitamin B3 so you need additional supplements or products that
contain niacinamide.

Why Is Niacinamide A Favorite For Many
People?

Niacinamide is a “all-purpose ingredient” that is often used as an anti-acne ingredient with
anti-inflammatory effects. Not only that, this compound is also able to reduce the appearance
of pores.

For owners of oily skin, niacinamide can help balance oil and sebum production. So, if Sinaumed’s
is one of those people who doesn’t like oil-based skincare products , niacinamide is an
ingredient that is perfect for you.

Moreover, according to a study, the effectiveness of using niacinamide to reduce moderate inflammatory acne
reaches 4%, especially for pustules and papules. So, it’s natural that many people like this
one material.

Benefits of Niacinamide for Skin

1. Keeps skin strong and healthy

Niacinamide is an ingredient that plays an important role in the formation of keratin, a protein that keeps
skin strong and healthy. In addition, niacinamide is also able to stimulate the formation of a
layer of ceramide which can maintain and protect skin tissue moisture.

2. Reduce skin inflammation

The appearance of pimples will usually result in inflammation of the skin. Niacinamide is a
compound that can reduce inflammation because it contains anti-inflammatory and antioxidant
substances.

These two ingredients play a major role in relieving skin inflammation, so that the skin can avoid reddish
spots and acne blemishes. As a result, the skin looks cleaner.

On the other hand, niacinamide is also effective for treating acne that is already quite severe, especially
acne that sticks out (papule type) and contains pus (pustule type). With regular use for a
certain period of time, facial skin will improve and skin texture will become more even.

3. Treat acne

For those of you who have acne, niacinamide can be the first choice because this compound has benefits for
treating acne on the skin. In fact, for acne that is severe and already inflamed, such as acne
pustules and papules.

According to Experimental Dermatology research , niacinamide is effective for increasing the
skin’s defense function, locking in moisture, preventing irritation, and also dispelling acne-causing
bacteria.

Therefore, if you regularly use skincare that contains niacinamide, you can treat acne until the scars and
skin texture get even better.

4. Remove acne marks

One of the main benefits of niacinamide is removing black spots from acne scars on the face.
Some studies even suggest that 5% niacinamide content in skin care products can be used as a remedy
for acne scars.

Scientists believe this benefit is obtained from the function of niacinamide which can stimulate collagen
production so that black spots which are acne scars can be disguised.

Sinaumed’s can use skincare products containing niacinamide regularly. Usually, results
will be visible after 4 weeks, but not later than two months.

5. Skin protection from sunlight

When the skin is exposed to sunlight too often, black spots from acne scars can become inflamed again.
This is where the role of nicotinamide is needed because this compound is able to protect moisture
and skin strength from sunlight which can damage acne scars.

6. Prevent premature aging

Niacinamide has also been shown to be effective in preventing signs of premature aging of the skin such as
fine lines and wrinkles. Therefore, this one ingredient is often used in anti-aging products.
Moreover, niacinamide can also prevent skin aging caused by pollution, toxins from the environment,
or sunlight.

7. Makes skin look clean

Niacinamide is a compound that can help balance the production of sebum and oil in the skin, so that the
skin looks cleaner and brighter because it avoids acne. What’s more, niacinamide is also known
as an anti-inflammatory ingredient. However, you should avoid using niacinamide when acne is
inflamed.

8. Against free radicals

Free radicals or unstable molecules can arise due to stress, lack of sleep, pollution, UV rays, and other
factors. When these free radicals appear, they can damage healthy skin cells, causing signs of
premature aging such as wrinkles or skin discoloration.

Niacinamide is a compound with antioxidant properties that can protect the skin from damage.

9. Moisturizing skin

Apart from fighting free radicals, niacinamide can also moisturize facial skin. This benefit
is proven by research results published in the Journal of Cosmetic Dermatology .
According to the study, niacinamide is able to help build a fat barrier layer called ceramide,
so skin moisture can be maintained.

Even more interesting, the function of this one niacinamide can be felt by all types of facial skin.
Especially for those of you who have eczema or aging skin. Niacinamide is also able to
build proteins in the skin and lock in moisture so that the skin is protected from environmental
damage.

10. Reduce irritation

The next benefit of niacinamide is that it helps delay aging which can cause irritation. These
compounds can soothe the skin and limit irritation caused by exfoliation.

In addition, this one ingredient can also be used to relieve inflammation and redness. What’s
even better, niacinamide is very safe to use and suitable for almost all skin types.

11. Shrink skin pores

It is undeniable, pores that look large can indeed be annoying. But you don’t need to worry
anymore, because Sinaumed’s can shrink skin pores by using niacinamide.

This one benefit is obtained from the way niacinamide works in maintaining the balance of oil production in the
skin so it doesn’t clog dirt, doesn’t accumulate, and also smoothes the appearance of the skin.

12. Ward off harmful aggressors

Pollution, cigarette smoke, UV rays, and stress are examples of harmful aggressors for facial skin.
These aggressors can cause free radicals and damage healthy skin cells.

Well, niacinamide is a compound that is an antioxidant, so it can neutralize free radicals and protect the
skin from the damaging effects they cause. In fact, niacinamide is also able to reverse the
damage that has occurred.

13. Prevent melanoma

Melanoma is a type of skin cancer that usually appears in the cells that produce melanin or the pigment
that gives color to our skin. Melanoma skin cancer is believed to arise due to exposure to UV
rays which damage cells in the skin.

Taking supplements containing niacinamide is believed to increase the repair of skin DNA damaged by UV rays.

14. Minimize eczema

Eczema is an allergic reaction on the skin. Eczema is usually characterized by the appearance
of itching and redness. In general, eczema will attack owners of sensitive and dry skin.
What’s worse, even though it’s been cured, this skin cancer can still reappear.

This is where niacinamide is needed. This one compound can reduce redness caused by irritation
of the skin, eczema and other skin inflammation.

15. Prevent dehydration

The last benefit of niacinamide for the skin is preventing dehydration. Yup, the skin can also
feel dehydrated or lack of fluids. This one problem can cause the skin to become dull, dry, and
itchy.

Niacinamide is a compound that has been proven to be able to help prevent dehydration of the skin.
Not only that, niacinamide can even reduce irritation and inflammation of the skin.

Can Niacinamide be Combined with Other
Substances?

There are many types of skincare products and each product must have different ingredients.
Some contain Vitamin C, some contain Niacinamide.

So, Sinaumed’s needs to know that niacinamide cannot be combined with other substances, especially Vitamin C.
If the two are combined, the effectiveness of each substance will actually be reduced. In
addition, the use of both together can also increase the risk of skin redness or uneven skin tone.

Not only Vitamin C, niacinamide should not be combined with BHA/AHA. You see, BHA / AHA and
niacinamide have active ingredients that are acidic. So when combined, these two substances
cannot work optimally. It can even trigger irritation or heat reactions on the skin.

To study the ingredients commonly used in skincare, Sinaumed’s can use the book All About
Skincare written by Nada A. as the main reference. This book is here as a
travel companion to find out more about caring for facial skin using skincare products. No
need to worry anymore about looking for references in caring for facial skin because this book
discusses:

• how to know facial skin;
• skincare ingredients that should be avoided;
• recommendations for food sources of nutrition for the skin; And
• how to use skincare properly and precisely according to skin type.

What Are the Side Effects of Niacinamide?

In general, niacinamide is a safe ingredient to use. However, this substance can also trigger
the release of histamine which can cause an allergic reaction. So if you’ve had an allergic
reaction before, you better be careful.

Furthermore, niacinamide can also cause a red rash and a mild itchy reaction. Therefore, for
those of you who have sensitive skin, you have to be extra careful because you are more susceptible to this
reaction.

Even so, you can prevent more severe effects by doing a sensitivity test before using skin care products
that contain niacinamide. The steps are:

• Use skincare products that contain niacinamide (just the size of a coin) on your arm
  skin.
• After that, wait up to 24 hours.
• If after 24 hours, you start to experience redness, swelling, or itching, immediately wash the area that was
  smeared with the skincare product and stop using it.
• If you find that there are no side effects, then the skincare product you choose is safe to
  use.

How Much Niacinamide Levels Are Safe
For Facial Skin?

The content of niacinamide in skin care products varies greatly. Some are 0.5%, 2%, 10%, even
up to 12-15%. So, how many levels of niacinamide are safe for facial skin?

The answer is, depending on the type and condition of the skin when you are going to use care products that
contain niacinamide. The higher the niacinamide level, the greater the risk of skin
irritation.

If you have sensitive skin or have never used niacinamide before, it’s better to choose a product that contains
0.5% to 2% niacinamide.

What are the rules for using niacinamide for
skin?

Even though it is considered safe for anyone to use, niacinamide still has side effects that can appear at
any time. Therefore, you must use it as directed or follow the instructions on the product
packaging label or follow the directions of a dermatologist.

For its own use, it’s quite easy. First, you have to make sure your hands are clean before
using products containing niacinamide. Wash your hands first with soap and then dry using a
towel.

After that, put enough drops or apply the product on the problematic skin area. Then flatten
it using a cotton bud, sterile cotton, or your own fingers. Then wash your hands and leave the
skin for a while so that the niacinamide absorbs into the skin.

You need to know, after using this product, you must avoid direct exposure to sunlight and heat so that the
contents are maintained and not damaged.

If you want to use other skincare products that contain Vitamin C or BHA/AHA, you should wait
a few days first. If after using a niacinamide product, your skin feels sore or a similar
reaction appears, immediately consult a skin specialist to get further treatment.

Find a guide to using various skincare products for facial skin care in the book Skincare
101 written by Wardah Nafisah. This book discusses:

• The complete stages of skin care according to its type: normal, oily, dry and combination.
• Natural remedies for skin that you can make yourself at home.
• Anti aging care series.
• Recommended food sources of nutrition for the skin.
• List of ingredients in cosmetics with the order scale.
• How to choose the right beauty clinic.

Some Niacinamide Products For Facial Skin

There are many topical niacinamide products in serum form. In addition, this one compound is
also often used for extra care that can solve skin problems beyond toners, cleansers, and moisturizers.
There are also creams, cleansers, and face masks that contain niacinamide.

As for what you need to remember, most skin care products contain 0.5% to 5% niacinamide.
According to some reports, the content of 5% niacinamide has been effective for treating
hyperpigmentation and damage caused by sunlight.

For those of you who don’t know, niacinamide can also be called “Nicotinamide” or “Niacin” in some products.

Then, more importantly, you have to remember that everyone’s skin type is different. You and
your mother, for example, may have very different skin types. Therefore, before using skin care
products that contain niacinamide, you should first identify your skin condition.

From the discussion above, it can be said that niacinamide is a derivative of Vitamin B3 or niacin which
has many benefits. Hopefully all the discussion about niacinamide is useful for you.
If you want to find books about beauty, then you can get them at
sinaumedia.com .

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has
#MoreWithReading information.

Author: Gilang Oktaviana Putra

Reference:

• https://hellosehat.com/Jadi-kulit/perawatan-kulit/niacinamide-untuk-kulit/
• https://www.halodoc.com/artikel/this-benefits-niacinamide-for-skin-and-face care
• https://www.loreal-paris.co.id/beauty-magazine/selain-mencerahkan-ini-5-untung-niacinamide-lainnya
• https://www.dove.com/id/stories/tips-and-how-to/tips-perspiration/mengenal-niacimide.html
• https://www.sehatq.com/artikel/benefits-niacinamide-for-face #benefits-niacinamide-for-skin-face
• https://www.orami.co.id/magazine/niacinamide

What is an NGO – Does Sinaumed’s often take part in social actions around the
neighborhood, both personally and on behalf of educational institutions? Or maybe Sinaumed’s
wants to take part in this voluntary social action but doesn’t know where to start?

Well, those social actions are usually initiated by NGOs alias Non-Governmental Organizations.
Maybe for some Sinaumed’s there are those who still feel foreign to the existence
of this Non-Governmental Organization, because in Indonesia itself it has a different name, namely
Non-Governmental Organizations aka NGOs. Yep, as the name implies, this NGO works
voluntarily and independently without any interference from the government at all.

If the government does not intervene, what about their funding? Of course there are many
options. Starting from donations from cooperating companies, voluntary donations from the
surrounding community, to raising funds by selling. All of that is done solely to carry out
social action to the community directly. So, what exactly is a Non-Governmental Organization?
What are the types and roles of NGOs for the civilization of this society? Are there
any NGOs in Indonesia? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at
the following review!

What are NGOs?

Basically, this NGO alias Non-Governmental Organization is an organization that is not prioritizing profit
and is engaged in civil and environmental benefits. The definition of an NGO is not limited to
organizations that serve the social needs of the community, yes, but also for several companies.

Well, this Non Governmental Organization can be considered as an organization that is almost the same as a
company in general, so of course there will be workers from various fields. The difference is,
the workers at this NGO are volunteers who are not paid, but some are freelancers. Not
infrequently, this NGO opens job vacancies for several staff.

Since this Non-Governmental Organization operates more cooperatively than commercially, this NGO does not
have any relationship with the state government. In addition, NGOs are also more non-profit
(non-commercial) and non-criminal, because they prioritize the interests of the social environment.

Just a little trivia, even though this NGO operates without any intervention from the government, they still
respect and obey the laws that apply , especially in the local environment.

Previously it was explained several times that these NGOs operate independently of the government, so they
are very brave in their efforts to criticize the policies of both the government and the private sector.
Moreover, if these policies are so detrimental to society at large.

In every country, there must be a Non-Governmental Organization that is engaged in a certain field and it
is not uncommon for it to increase every year. In Indonesia, the number of Non-Governmental
Organizations, which are known as NGOs, has grown to 390 thousand. Meanwhile in China, the
number even reaches 440 thousand! Actually, this is only natural, because through this NGO,
people can fight for social issues, especially policies that are detrimental to them.

Characteristics of NGOs or NGOs

As previously explained, the characteristics of an NGO are:

• Runs independently, without any interference from the government so it is not affiliated with a particular
  political.
• Non-profit alias not seeking any profit (in the form of rupiah).
• More in favor of the lower level of society.
• Voluntarily, working for the social and environmental interests of society.
• Non-bureaucrat, the procedures carried out are not convoluted.

History of NGOs in the World and Indonesia

A Brief History of NGOs in the World

The emergence of NGOs, aka Non-Governmental Organizations, began when the United Nations (UN) was established in
1945. The existence of these NGOs has been regulated in Article 71 Chapter 10 of the UN Charter regarding the
consultative role of non-governmental organizations.

Many consider that the term NGO is only to distinguish between the participatory rights of government agencies (
Intergovernmental Agencies ) and international private organizations ( International Private
Organizations ). In fact, at the beginning of the 19th century, NGOs played a major
role for society, one of which was as a balancing force against the United States
government.

At that time, the US public thought that the government had indeed neglected human rights and environmental
health, especially in its efforts to implement the government system. This was then championed
by volunteers who joined independent, non-governmental organizations. Together they fight for
their rights for themselves, the environment, and society.

A Brief History of NGOs in Indonesia

In Indonesia, these NGOs are called NGOs, aka Non-Governmental Organizations. NGOs in
Indonesia have been included in the category of Community Organizations so that they are regulated in Law
No. 8 of 1985 and Government Regulation No. 18 of 1986. In fact, the forerunners to the establishment of
these NGOs were NGOs alias Non-Governmental Organizations that emerged in the early 1970s.

Unfortunately, however, there has been much criticism of these NGOs because their institutions are
considered too broad to include the private sector (business). Many people stated that the
existence of NGOs at that time covered a field that was too broad and their identity was hardly in line with
NGOs. After that, the NGO was not mentioned again.

In 1980, the term NGO was used for the first time when an NGO seminar was held at the Indonesian Workers’
Foundation building. At that time, the speakers did not use the term NGO anymore, because they
were worried that it would create a misunderstanding, namely as an organization that is “opposite to the
government”. Although in reality, NGOs are not always on the opposite side of the government.
Sinaumed’s must have realized that in those years, the political atmosphere in Indonesia
was not conducive.

Just a little information, actually this NGO phenomenon has existed since 1908, namely the Boedi Oetomo
organization which is considered the first non-governmental organization in Indonesia. As we
know, the founder of Boedi Oetomo at that time was Soetomo, who was still a student at that time, not from
the government.

What’s more, in the first 6 months, Boedi Oetomo was only active in social fields, starting from developing
middle class business capital, developing home industries, to unification of the poor.
Unfortunately, this organization did not last long because over time it was even controlled by the
government apparatus.

So, let’s return to the discussion on NGOs, shall we? The term NGO is then explicitly defined in the
Instruction of the Minister of Home Affairs (Inmendagri) No. 8/1990, addressed to Governors
throughout Indonesia regarding Development of Non-Governmental Organizations.

In the appendix, it states that NGOs are “organizations/institutions whose members are citizens of the Republic
of Indonesia who voluntarily or of their own accord intend and engage in certain areas of activity determined by
the organization/institution as a form of community participation in an effort to improve the standard of living
and welfare of the community.” , which focuses on self-help service.”

With the development of the times, the journey of NGOs has also been in accordance with the characteristics
of NGOs in general, namely oriented towards strengthening community groups, strongly committed to the ideals
of people’s participation, and mutually supporting the exchange of ideas and resources.
Examples of NGOs alias NGOs in Indonesia are the Indonesian Child Protection Agency (LPAI), the
Indonesian Legal Aid Foundation (YLBHI), Indonesia Corruption Watch (ICW), and many others.

Types of NGOs

In this world, there are various types of NGOs operating according to their respective goals and fields.

Based on Organizational Focus

1. Charitable Orientation

This type of NGO focuses on helping underprivileged communities with the aim of alleviating poverty.
Not infrequently they will provide assistance to victims of natural disasters. They
will move by distributing groceries, clothes, medicines, school supplies, housing, and
transportation.

2. Life Service Organization ( Service
Orientation )

This type of NGO will focus on public health services, family planning programs, and education equity
programs, especially in remote areas. The form of activity can be in the form of providing
assistance that is needed by many people. For example, health assistance with mobile medical
services.

3. Community Participatory
Organizations ( Participatory Orientation )

Their activities will directly involve the local community. Usually, they will collect
donations from the community, which can be in the form of cash, land, raw materials, equipment, and labor.
This type of NGO does not have sufficient resources so it requires community participation.

4. Empowering Organization ( Empowering
Orientation )

Their project will focus on facilitating the community, especially the grassroots, regarding insight and
understanding in various fields. The goal, of course, is to empower the community regarding
social, political, and economic understanding that greatly influences everyday life. Usually
carried out with seminar activities.

Based on Operational Level

1. Community Based Organizations/ CBOs

This type of NGO developed on the initiative of existing communities, for example sports club
organizations, women’s organizations, educational organizations, arts organizations, and others.
Since this NGO was formed based on the community, then of course it has the same social
problems.

2. Urban Scope ( Citywide Organizations )

Namely the aid provider in every community in a city. Usually, their services only focus on
lower-level people.

3. National Scope (National NGO )

The operational scope of this type of NGO is within the country. Not infrequently, this type
of NGO also has branches in several countries and holds the responsibility to help each other with other
branch NGOs. Examples: Indonesian Red Cross (PMI), Indonesian Forum for the Environment
(WALHI), and others.

4. International Scope ( International NGO)

As the name implies, this type of NGO operates internationally or globally. The goal is to
help the world community to be more prosperous by providing assistance to smaller non-governmental
organizations. Even though these types of NGOs have diverse orientations, they only focus on
political and social equality across society. Example: Greenpeace and WWF.

The Role of NGOs in Society

The existence of NGOs certainly plays an important role in the lives of many people, including the less
fortunate. They will jointly fight for the welfare of people’s lives and not take advantage of
it. So here are the roles of NGOs for the community:

1. Encouraging the Emergence of Sustainable
Innovation

Actually, not only innovation will be supported by NGOs, but also trials and pilot projects.
Yep, this NGO will play a role in planning the implementation of various innovative activities.
What’s more, the number of NGOs in each country is very large, so that its application in terms of
innovation in various fields can continue for the community. Not only that, NGOs are also able
to carry out pilot projects from the government, even faster than the government itself.

2. As a Representative of Certain Community
Groups

Since these NGOs fight for the social rights of the community without interference from the government,
they act as representatives as well as the forefront of the community, especially if there are government
policies or programs that are considered detrimental to many communities. It can be said that
this NGO will act as an advocate and try to facilitate a group of people to voice their voice.

3. Development and Development on
Aspects of Social Life

In accordance with its main objective, NGOs play a major role in efforts to develop and develop people’s
lives in the social field. Yep, they will be oriented towards progress in society, of
course.

4. As an Aspirator

That is, NGOs will act as aspirators, alias intermediaries for conveying messages between the community and
the government. Especially regarding complaints and problems that arise in the social sphere.
Usually, with the strategic role of these NGOs, their voices will be quickly heard by the
government.

5. Technical Assistance and Monitoring

NGOs will participate in training efforts and technical assistance to community organizations.
In addition, monitoring and evaluation efforts will also be carried out effectively (usually when
there is a project) for maximum results.

5 Examples of NGOs in Indonesia

In Indonesia, there are many NGOs alias NGOs that are developing and operating in various fields.
Of course, their goal is to fight for people’s rights without government interference.
Besides the Indonesian Child Protection Agency (LPAI), Indonesian Legal Aid Foundation (YLBHI),
Indonesia Corruption Watch (ICW), what other non-governmental organizations exist in our country?
Come on, see the following reviews!

1. Marine Conservation Foundation (YKL)

This foundation was formed in Makassar, South Sulawesi in 1996 and later officially became a
non-governmental legal entity. The existence of YKL is committed to the importance of
conservation in coastal areas, the sea, to the management of small islands. Their projects also
often use alternative technologies that are environmentally friendly so that they also empower the lives of
local communities.

2. SUSTAINABLE Indonesia

This NGO is engaged in sustainable forest management projects. Even indirectly, LESTARI
Indonesia also helps the government to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and preserve biodiversity in forest
and mangrove ecosystems. Since the goal is forest management, their focus is on several areas
that still have a lot of green forests, for example Aceh, Central Kalimantan, to Papua.

3. Indonesian Child Protection Agency (LPAI)

Surely Sinaumed’s is no stranger to this one NGO? Yep, as the name implies,
this NGO is primarily focused on providing assistance to protect children. The main points
of concern for this NGO are child exploitation, child trafficking, kidnapping, acts of violence,
neglect, and sexual abuse of children.

4. The Indonesian Legal Aid Foundation (YLBHI)

This NGO is active in the field of law. Later, their members will provide assistance,
especially to the lower middle class in resolving legal cases or when they become victims of criminal
acts.

5. PEKA Indonesia Foundation

The PEKA (Care for Nature Conservation) Indonesia Foundation was established in August 2000 in Bogor, West
Java. As the name implies, they will be engaged in nature conservation and are active in
research, conservation education, and community development. Not only that, the PEKA Indonesia
Foundation also promotes ecosystem health, aka Ecosystem Health, in Indonesian society.

So, that’s a review of what an NGO is and its development in Indonesia as an NGO.

Ngaben and Melasti: Two Balinese Traditional Ceremonies You Must Know!
– The enchantment of natural beauty on the island of Bali is indeed
unquestionable. Throughout the island we can enjoy the various natural beauty that
stretches, starting from the mountains, beaches and lakes are also available. Even so,
there are unique things that make Bali even more special, namely the preservation of culture that is
deeply felt in the joints of the people’s lives. Visiting the island of Bali will feel more
special if we manage to get various exciting moments by witnessing traditional ceremonies in Bali first
hand. Generally, these traditional ceremonies can be witnessed by tourists for mere
spectacle or as documentation.

In the following, there are two Balinese traditional ceremonies that Sinaumed’s must know about!

1. Ngaben Ceremony

The Ngaben ceremony is a ceremonial procession of burning corpses or also known as cremation.
The Ngaben ceremony is performed by Hindus in Bali. Hindus in Bali believe that Ngaben
can purify the spirits of family members who have died and are heading to their final resting place.

The Origins of the Ngaben Ceremony

Reporting from the Indonesia Kaya website, according to Nyoman Singgin Wikarman, the word “Ngaben” comes
from the word “beya” which means provision. Ngaben is also called palebon which comes from the
word “lebu” which means prathiwi or land (dust). To make a human body that has died into a
soil, one way is by burning it.

In the teachings of Hinduism, apart from being believed to be the creator god, Lord Brahma has the form of
the God of Fire. So the Ngaben ceremony is a procession of purifying the spirit which is
carried out by burning it with fire so that it can go back to the Creator. The fire that burned
the corpse is believed to be an incarnation of Lord Brahma.

The fire will burn all the dirt attached to the body as well as the soul or spirit of the person who has
died. Hindus believe that humans are made up of three layers, namely raga sarira, suksma
sarira , and also atahkarana sarira . Raga sarira is
the gross body or physical body of a human being. Suksma sarira is the astral body in the
form of thoughts, desires, feelings, and lust. Meanwhile, antakkarana
sarira is the cause of life or Sanghyang Atma .

When a human has died, his body cannot function anymore. Meanwhile, the
atma (soul/spirit) that has been in the body for too long and has been confined by the
sarira spirit must leave the body as soon as possible, because if it
takes too long, the atma will feel suffering. Humans who have
passed away need to be given a ceremony in order to speed up the process of returning the gross body to
its source in nature, namely the five mahabhuta : earth (soil),
apah (water), teja (fire),
bayu (air), and also akasa (space). .

If the Ngaben ceremony is postponed for a long period of time, the spirit will roam and turn into bhuta
cuwil . Likewise if a person who dies is buried in the ground without holding an
appropriate ceremony. This is because the spirits have not been able to let go of their
attachment to the human realm. Therefore, it is necessary to hold the Ngaben bhuta cuwil
ceremony.

Implementation of the Ngaben Ceremony

In the Ngaben ceremony, all residents of the banjar (level pillars of the community) are required to assist
in all the preparations. There are lots of offerings to be prepared and lots of processions to
be made.

Two important things to do are badé and patulangan . Badé are pagoda-like towers
with an odd number of towers used to carry dead bodies. Patulangan is a sarcophagus in the form
of an animal or mythological creature as a place for the bodies to be cremated.

Badé and patulangan have various sizes and shapes as indicators of the social status of the deceased.
In fact, since the 2000s a phenomenon has emerged, namely the wheeled badé
. A wheeled badé is a normal badé but is fitted with wheels so that
it can be pushed and makes it easier to move the body.

Badé beroda makes the Ngaben ceremony procession simpler without requiring a lot of effort and other
equipment that can cost a lot of money. The Ngaben ceremony will begin with a procession.
Each family member brings a photo of the deceased or the body to be burned .

The sound of Balinese gamelan also accompanied the group to the Ngaben location. After the
body is burned or cremated , the remaining ashes from the burning are put into ivory
coconuts which will later be floated into the sea or river which is considered sacred. For
those who do not have the cost, the bodies will usually be buried first.

Ngaben can be done after many years after the family of the deceased has sufficient funds.
Mass or collective Ngaben ceremonies are also often held. The family can carry out the
ritual by paying a certain amount of money or even for free if it really belongs to the poor.

Even so, the mass Ngaben is still carried out without losing the essence of the tradition at all from the Ngaben
ceremony itself.

The purpose of the Ngaben ceremony

The purpose of the Ngaben ceremony is to speed up Ragha Sarira so that he can return to his origin, namely
the five maha buthadi alam and for the atma it is hoped that he can quickly go to the
pitra realm . Reporting from the kesrasetda.bulelengkab.go.id site, the
philosophical foundations of Ngaben in general are the five sradhas, namely the five basic frameworks of
Hinduism namely Brahman, Atman, Karmaphala, Samsara and also
Moksa . Meanwhile, Ngaben is specifically held as a form of love for the
ancestors and devotion from a child to his parents.

The Ngaben ceremony is a process of returning the five maha butha elements to the Creator.
Ngaben is also often referred to as pitra yadnya ( ejection of yama
purwana tattwa ). Pitra means an ancestor or person who has died while yadnya is
a sincere and sincere sacred offering.

Types of Ngaben Ceremonies

1. Ngewangun Confession Ceremony

All organs of the body (as a cloud ) receive ceremonial materials so that there
are many ceremonies . This type of Ngaben is followed by
Pengaskaran . There are two types of ceremonies namely:

1. The Pengabenan ceremony mewangun Sawa Pratek Utama , there is a corpse or watang matah
   .
2. The Ngabenan Ceremony mewangun Wedana’s Life , there is no body but is symbolized by using a
   sandalwood scene that has been drawn and written using the sangkanparan script.

Wedana’s life comes from the word Nyawa or Nyayang (made as a symbol).
Vedana means form or form. Thus, the life of the wedana has
the meaning of making an image as a human symbol.

2. Pranawa Ngabenan Ceremony

Pengabenan which means the ritual is addressed to the nine holes that exist in humans. Pranawa comes from
the word Prana (hole, path, breath) and Nawa (meaning nine).
The nine holes in question are:

1. Udana (eyebrow), affects the good and bad thoughts
2. Dates (eye holes) affect the good and bad buddhi.
3. Krkara (nostrils), influencing Tri Kaya , honesty and lies.
4. Krana (mouth hole). Many sins come from the mouth ( Tri Mala Forced )
5. Dhananjya (gullet). The powers that affect mana – pride and
   disobedience
6. Samana (the pit of destruction), the influence of the soul to become greedy and greedy.
7. The dragon (stomach hole) is a character influence that has a connection with Sad Ripu
8. Wyana (joint holes) affect actions to create Subha Asubha Karma .
9. Apana (pubic buttocks) influences kama which is related to Sapta Timira .

These nine human holes can be an introduction to humans into the valley of sin.

Pengabenan Pranawa is also carried out with a dedication ceremony.

There are five types of Pengaban Pranawa

1. Sawa Pranawa: accompanied by a corpse or watang matah
2. Kusa Pranawa: with watang matah or just using scenes. This scene will later be
   accompanied by crew from a hundred katih ambengan .
   Using a ceremony of acculturation.
3. Toya Pranawa: the same as Kusa Pranawa, except that in the scene it is filled with pere breast filled
   with water and equipped with thickening agents and also using Pengaskaran
   .
4. Gni Pranawa: Just like the other pranawa, it also carries out warriors but it is
   insulting which is carried out in setra after
   the sawa turns into a single sekah .

Without uperengga which resembles resin brackets, overlapping salu, pepelengkungan, ancak served,
bale paga, three sampir, antakesuma clothes, paying pagut . Only use
dammar layon , casket and also papaya or penusangan.

5. Sapta Pranawa: this ceremony is carried out at home, using damar brackets and also the
   procession .

Even so, if you don’t use Bale Paga when carrying the body to the setra. Just using
pepaga or penusangan is done directly at the setra , but the
implementation of the refining process is stagnant , and the implementation of the
eradication is over the edge .

3. Swastha Confession Ceremony

Pengabangan is simple, with the smallest level because it doesn’t use coarsening . Means
not using a kajang which automatically means it is done without a bachelor
ceremony ceremony . Do not use bale paga, damar brackets, damar layon,
angenan damar, petulangan, three sampir, antakesuma clothes and also pagut umbrellas.

Pengabenan Swastha only uses a coffin and papaya or penusangan to bring him to
setra . Implementation of the ceremony only in setra
only. The Swastha Geni recitation is often confused with the Pranawa Geni
recitation.

Private comes from the word “su” (main, flexible). Astha comes from the word Asthi (ash,
bone). Thus Swastha has the meaning of recitation which returns to its core but still has
the main value. Pengaban swastha consists of two types, namely:

1. Pengaban Swastha Geni

Settlement in setra is carried out by burning the corpse or without using the corpse. There is
only the implementation of “delivery” after a single form of sekah is made , then it is
continued with the nganyut ceremony .

2. Bambang’s Swastha Confession

All sequences of implementation, the ceremony is carried out on the bambang where the bodies are
buried. The quantity of ceremonies is almost the same as Swastha
Geni’s recitation, except that the ceremony is added with “pengande bambang”. This swastha
bambang recitation does not include the lifting ceremony and the
sweeping ceremony , because the refining is not done by burning but by burial.

While the gluing and hardening are still carried out the same as normal Ngaben.
Pengabanan Swastha Geni or Swastha Bambang is included in the main refusal of the
main , not using bale paga , no rehearsals are carried out and at the time of
setra only use redemption .

4. Kerthi Parwa ceremony

Including mengabenan with the main nistaning level . This sacrifice is carried out for
Hindus who died in war. No warriors were carried out , only the
delivery and delivery ceremonies were carried out. The
implementation is the same as the Swastha Geni ceremony.

5. Ngaben Ngalanus Ceremony

Actually, it is not included as part of the type of recognition. It’s the same as an ordinary
Ngaben ceremony, only the technicalities are made quickly. There are two types of ngaben
ngelanus, namely:

1. Ngelanus Tandang Mantri.

The filling and measurement are completed within one day. This confession refers to the
religious literature ” Lontar Kramaning Aben Ngelanus “. Ngelanus Tandang Mantri
is also called Pemargi Ngeluwer . This confession is only done for
wiku and is not allowed for walaka .

2. Ngelanus Tumandang Mantri.

Done for the walaka within one to two days. The upakara and ceremonies depend on the
quantity of the ceremonies and ceremonies themselves.

2. Melasti Ceremony

The Saka New Year for Balinese Hindus is a good opportunity to start life again with a pure and clean heart.
Through the amati geni ritual on Nyepi Day, all Hindus essentially get the opportunity
to evaluate their life achievements in the past year and reconstruct their life plans for the coming
year.

Prior to this stage, from 2 to 4 days before Nyepi, the Hindu community on the island of Bali performs a
ritual of self-purification and purification of its environment. The ritual is called the
melasti ceremony.

The melasti ceremony or also called melelasti can be defined as nganyudang malaning gumi ngamet tirta
amerta, which means washing away natural impurities using the water of life. In Hindu
religious beliefs, water sources such as lakes and seas can be considered as the origin of the water of
life or tirta amerta.

These water sources will later provide life for all living things, including humans.
Therefore, the melasti ceremony is always held in special places such as the edge of a lake or
beach.

In the melasti ceremony, people will come in groups to water sources such as seas and lakes.
Each group or entourage usually comes from the same regional unit, for example from the same
village or banjar.

Each of these groups will come with a set of sacred worship tools, namely statues, pratima, and pralingga
from the temples in their respective areas. Later, these tools will be purified.
Each member of the community also prepares offerings according to their respective abilities.
This dish is a complementary part of the melasti ceremony.

Before the ritual is carried out, usually the committee from each group will provide a stage or table that
is positioned towards the back of the water source. This table is used as a place to place
various sacred worship items from the temple along with various offerings.

All members of the group then sit cross-legged facing the array of worship instruments and offerings, as
well as facing the source of the holy water. Religious leaders or local stakeholders will then
become leaders in the procession of this melasti ceremony.

The stakeholders will go around and sprinkle holy water on all the people present as well as worship items and
spread incense smoke as a form of purification.

Next, a prayer ritual was performed by all members of the group. The stakeholders will then
distribute holy water and also bija. Bija is rice that has been soaked in holy water.
The holy water will later be drunk while the bija will be put on the forehead of each parishioner
who comes. After the procession ends, the worship items are paraded back to the temple to
undergo other ritual stages.

Neutrophils are – White blood cells are the cells that make up blood components.
These white blood cells function to help the body fight various infectious diseases as part of the
immune system. White blood cells are colorless, nucleated, can migrate amoebae, and can
penetrate capillary or choroidal walls.

In the body, white blood cells are not closely associated with any particular organ or tissue, they
function independently as a single-celled organism. Leukocytes can move freely and interact
with and capture cellular debris, foreign particles or invading microorganisms.

Furthermore, white blood cells cannot divide or reproduce on their own but are a product of pluripotent
hematopoietic stem cells found in the bone marrow.

White blood cells have an important role in the immune system. Among the various types of
white blood cells, neutrophils are the most numerous, about 55-70%.

Neutrophils are a type of white blood cell that play an important role in your immune system.
Blood levels that are lower or higher than normal can indicate the condition of your body.

Sinaumed’s friends , maybe you are still new to the term neutrophil. In fact, it is
quite important to understand it because it is closely related to body health. In order to
understand this more deeply, come on, see the full review below!

What are Neutrophils?

Neutrophils (English: neutrophil, polymorphonuclear neutrophilic leukocyte, PMN) are white blood
cells belonging to the granulocyte group. Together with the other two granulocytes namely
eosinophils and basophils which have granules in the cytoplasm, they are also known as polymorphonuclear
leukocytes. Neutrophil granules are red-green.

This type of white blood cell is involved in the body’s defense against bacterial infections and other
inflammatory processes, and is also the first cell to appear when an infection occurs elsewhere.
. With phagocytic properties similar to macrophages, neutrophils attack pathogens by
invading the respiratory tract with a variety of toxic substances containing strong oxidants, including
hydrogen peroxide, oxygen free radicals, and hypochlorites.

The ratio of white blood cells to neutrophils is usually 50 to 60%. Normal adult bone marrow
produces at least 100 billion neutrophils per day, and this increases 10-fold in acute inflammation.

After leaving the bone marrow, this type of white blood cell will go through 6 morphological stages, namely:

neutrophils, metamorphosed, non-fragmented (banded), segmented neutrophils. Segmented
neutrophils are fully functional cells, containing cytoplasmic granules (primary or azurophil, secondary or
specific) and a hollow nucleus rich in chromatin. Damaged neutrophils appear as pus.

Neutrophils are the first leukocytes to reach areas of inflammation and initiate host defense against
pathogens. Neutrophil activation also plays a role in effective infection fighting, together
with monocytes and macrophages, through phagocytosis and microbiology or through release of pathogens,
inflammation such as oxygen radicals, proteases or peroxidases. Neutrophil migration from
circulating blood to inflamed tissues is a complex process and depends on many cellular functions.
One of the keys to this process is the adhesion receptor (Craig et al., 2009).

Histopathological observations were made by counting the number of inflammatory cells (neutrophils), the
formation of new blood vessels (neovascularization), the percentage of re-epithelialization, and the
percentage of collagen connective tissue area (Chen et al., 2005; Winarsih et al., 2010). The
rate of re-epithelialization is calculated by the following formula: the length of the wound with new
epithelium divided by the total length of the wound multiplied by 100%. Calculations were
performed on 10 visual fields with an objective magnification of 40x and then averaged.

Neutrophil Function

In general, there are 2 types of white blood cells to pay attention to, neutrophils and lymphocytes.
Both function to maintain the immune system. The difference is that white blood cells
fight bacteria or viruses by producing antibodies, whereas neutrophils fight infection directly.

This type of white blood cell is produced in the bone marrow and distributed throughout the body via the
bloodstream. Unlike other white blood cells, neutrophils can leave blood vessels and enter
infected body tissues to fight bacteria or viruses.

Neutrophils help prevent infection by blocking, inactivating, digesting, and repelling invading particles
and microorganisms. This type of white blood cell constantly monitors for signs of infection
and reacts quickly to trap and destroy pathogens.

These white blood cells communicate with other cells to help repair damaged cells and promote an immune
response. In addition, these white blood cells also play an important role in regulating the
immune system and inflammation in the body.

The body produces these white blood cells in the bone marrow, which make up about 50-70% of the total
number of white blood cells in the blood. The overall level of white blood cells in the
bloodstream for an adult is 4500-11000 per cubic millimeter (mm3).

When there is an infection or other source of inflammation in the body, special chemicals alert mature
neutrophils, which then leave the bone marrow and travel through the bloodstream to where they are needed.

Band cells are an immature form of neutrophils that are produced when the body is fighting an infection or
inflammation. Excess band of cells in the blood is called hemophilia. When this
occurs, it usually indicates an infection or inflammation.

Unlike some other cells or blood components, neutrophils can cross the cell junctions lining the walls of blood
vessels and enter tissues directly.

Neutrophil Types

These neutrophils when examined in more detail microscopically, based on their shape, can be divided into 2
types, namely rod neutrophils and segmental neutrophils.

1. Stem Neutrophils

Stem neutrophils are immature forms of neutrophil cells which also function to help fight germs that enter the
body, and in general the normal ratio in the body is used as an international standard. The reality is 0% to 6%
(subject to change) depending on the reference each laboratory).

2. Segmented Neutrophils

Segmental neutrophils are fully functional cells containing cytoplasmic granulomas and chromatin-rich
hollow nuclei. Segmental neutrophils are involved in the body’s defense against infection and
inflammation and are the first cells to appear in the event of an infection.

Difference Between Stem Neutrophils and
Segment Neutrophils

The difference between the two is that rod neutrophils are the juvenile form of segmental neutrophils which
are commonly known as horseshoe neutrophils as they have a horseshoe shaped nucleus. Along with
the maturation process, the shape of the nucleus will be segmented and become segmented neutrophils.
Neutrophils have large pale pink cytoplasm and fine purple granules.

Segmental neutrophils, which have thin (pale) cytoplasmic granules, are often called polymorphonuclear
leukocytes because their nuclei consist of 2 to 5 segments (lobes) that differ in shape from one another and
are connected by chromatin filaments. The number of fractionated neutrophils is 3 to 6, and if
more than 6 are called hypersegmented neutrophils (Kiswari, 2014).

How to Calculate Neutrophil Levels in the Body

Neutrophils are granulocytes that are effective in defending organisms, especially against bacterial
infections (Widman, 1995; Howard, 2008). Total neutrophil value, hereinafter referred to as
ANC, is the number of immature and mature neutrophils circulating in the peripheral blood.

The number of PNC often increases in the presence of bacterial infection (Howard, 2008; Levy, 2004).
The ANC value can be calculated from the results of a typical count by adding the fractional
percentage and bars, then multiplying by the total white blood cell count.

Doctors can see the number of certain neutrophils in the body by doing a test called a complete blood count
(CBC).

You need to know that the normal number or level of white blood cells in an adult’s body is around 4,500 to
11,000 per microliter of blood. While the normal value or neutrophil level is 1500 to 8000 per
microliter of blood.

It’s more likely that your doctor will order a complete blood test when symptoms related to infection, injury, or
chronic disease are present.

If the white blood cell count on examination does not match normal limits, then proceed to look at the
neutrophil value. Checking neutrophil levels is also important.

The level of neutrophils in your white blood cells can be detected with a differential blood test which
includes checking the levels of each type of white blood cell. Blood differential tests can
also show abnormal cells in your blood.

This test is usually done to diagnose infection, anemia, or leukemia. This test can also be
used to check whether the treatment you are undergoing is going well.

Any infection or acute stress can increase your white blood cell count and form a condition called
leukocytosis. A high white blood cell count can be caused by inflammation, an immune response,
or a blood disease such as leukemia.

It is important to know that an abnormal increase in one type of white blood cell can decrease the number of
another.

Function Disturbances

An increase in the number of neutrophils is called neutrophilia. Neutropenia can occur as a
result of a physiological response to stress, for example by exercise, extreme weather conditions, acute
bleeding or hemolysis, childbirth, and acute emotional stress.

Pathological conditions that cause neutropenia include acute infection, inflammation or inflammation,
tissue damage, metabolic disorders, appendicitis, and myeloid leukemia. While a decrease in the
number of neutrophils is known as neutropenia, neutropenia is found in viral diseases, leprosy, leukemia,
erythrocytosis, anemia, drug effects (Riswanto, 2013).

Neutrophilia

Having very high levels of neutrophils in the blood is called neutropenia or also known as neutrophilia.

Neutrophilia is a condition where the number of neutrophils in the blood exceeds normal limits.
Some conditions that can cause neutrophilia include strenuous exercise, smoking, extreme stress,
injuries or burns, infectious diseases, and blood cancers.

This is an important function of neutrophilia in the immune system. Remember that neutrophil
levels can also describe your health. However, this is not the only visible benchmark.

If you feel any complaints, try to consult a doctor. If your doctor recommends a complete
blood count to look at your white blood cell or neutrophil levels, ask your doctor about the purpose of the
test and what you need to prepare before the test.

1. Stress

The number of neutrophils can increase due to stress, such as exercise, epilepsy, and stress.

2. Bacterial infection

Sudden onset of bacterial infection can cause tissue inflammation leading to a sharp increase in neutrophil
count.

3. Ketosis

Ketosis occurs when the body makes acids and toxins. When the disease moves to a chronic
stage, it can cause an increase in the number of neutrophils.

4. Eclampsia

Occurs in second trimester pregnant women due to increased blood pressure, increased protein in the urine and
edema.

5. Cancer

The number of neutrophils can increase as cancer spreads throughout the body.

6. Hemolytic anemia

Occurs when red blood cells are damaged and cause disruption of oxygen transport in the blood.

7. Treatment effect

Some drugs can cause a large increase in the absolute number of neutrophils. Like,
corticosteroids. The effects of these drugs are similar to corticosteroid hormones.
This hormone can control the nutrients, salt and water in the body.

In general, the main cause of neutrophilia is a bacterial infection. In addition, lifestyle
factors, such as excessive exercise, stress, and smoking, can also increase the risk of neutrophilia.

In old age, a high white blood cell count can occur due to infection, corticosteroid treatment, Down’s syndrome,
or delayed separation of the umbilical cord.

Treatment of neutrophilia usually depends on the disease or condition causing it. Consult a
doctor to find out more definite causes and treatment.

Neutropenia

A low level of neutrophils is called neutropenia. The cause of a low neutrophil count usually
occurs when the body uses immune cells more quickly than normal.

Neutropenia is a condition when the level of neutrophils in the blood is below normal limits.
Several conditions can cause leukopenia, including vitamin B12 deficiency, aplastic anemia,
tuberculosis, autoimmune diseases, and side effects of certain drugs or chemotherapy.

Another possible cause of decreased neutrophil value and function is if the bone marrow is abnormally producing
neutrophils.

Furthermore, an enlarged spleen can also lead to decreased levels of neutrophils because the spleen can destroy
neutrophils and other blood cells.

The following conditions and procedures are risk factors for a low neutrophil level, such as:

1. Deficiency of folic acid (B12)

Reduced levels of B12 in the body can cause a decrease in ANC, which makes the body unable to function optimally.

2. Severe bacterial infection

Severe infection can cause destruction of neutrophils, leading to the formation of pus in the blood.

3. Aplastic anemia

Aplastic anemia can occur when the bone marrow cannot produce enough blood cells in the body.

4. Preleukemia and Leukemia

Leukemia is an increase in the number of white blood cells in the body that are large and not

normal, while preleukemia is a decrease in the number of white blood cells in the body.

5. Autoimmune disease

When the body produces proteins such as antineutrophils which destroy neutrophils. For example
in people with lupus.

6. Impotence

Erectile dysfunction is an abnormal enlargement of the spleen that occurs in the spleen and can cause an increase
in the white blood cell count.

7. Cardiopulmonary pathway

Conduction of blood flow from the heart to the lungs to the aorta can reduce blood neutrophils.

8. Dialysis

Dialysis to improve kidney function. Dialysis can reduce the neutrophil count.

9. Drug effect

Some drugs can reduce the number of neutrophils in the blood, such as allergy medications, psychosis, and nausea.

Difference between Neutrophils, Eosinophils and
Basophils

Neutrophils, eosinophils and basophils are myeloid cells formed during hematopoiesis. These
are all granulocytes circulating in the blood and migrating to inflamed tissues. The main
difference between neutrophil and basophil eosinophil is their structure and role in the vertebrate body.
Granulocytes and lymphocytes collectively form a group of cells called white blood cells.
Neutrophils are professional phagocytes involved in ingesting pathogens such as bacteria and
destroying them by intercellular digestion.

The recruitment of neutrophils to sites of inflammation is called chemotaxis, which is regulated by
cytokines. Eosinophils fight most parasites. They provide protection against
hypersensitivity reactions via cytotoxicity, which is mediated by the granular components.
Basophils, along with eosinophils and mast cells, provide defense against allergic reactions.
They also contain histamine and heparin, which help reduce blood clots.